User Guide
3Com Outdoor 11a Building to Building Bridge and
11bg Access Point
3CRWEASYA73 / WL-575
www.3Com.com
Part Number 10015232 Rev. AA
Published August, 2006
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product Features 1-1
Radio Characteristics 1-2
Wall- and Pole-Mounting Bracket Kit 1-7
System Configuration 1-7
Operating Modes 1-7
Point-to-Point Configuration 1-8
Point-to-Multipoint Configuration 1-8
Data Rates 2-2
Antenna Position and Orientation 2-6
Radio Interference 2-7
Weather Conditions 2-7
Ethernet Cabling 2-8
Grounding 2-8
3 Hardware Installation
Testing Basic Link Operation 3-2
Mount the Unit 3-2
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connect External Antennas 3-6
Connect the Power Injector 3-7
Check the LED Indicators 3-9
Align Antennas 3-10
Launch the 3COM Wireless Infrastructure Device Manager (Widman)
utility 4-2
Launching the 3com Wireless Interface Device Manager 4-2
First Time Only 4-4
Using the Setup Wizard 4-4
System Identification 5-4
TCP / IP Settings 5-5
RADIUS 5-8
Authentication 5-10
Filter Control 5-15
VLAN 5-17
SNMP 5-19
Administration 5-23
Upgrading Firmware 5-25
WDS and Spanning Tree Settings 5-28
System Log 5-33
Enabling System Logging 5-33
Configuring SNTP 5-34
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RSSI 5-35
Radio Interface 5-37
802.11b/g Interface 5-43
Security 5-50
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) 5-53
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) 5-57
Understanding Command Modes 6-5
Configuration Commands 6-6
Command Line Processing 6-6
B Cables and Pinouts
Twisted-Pair Cable Assignments B-1
10/100BASE-TX Pin Assignments B-2
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Straight-Through Wiring B-3
8-Pin DIN Connector Pinout B-5
8-Pin DIN to RJ-45 Cable Wiring B-6
Glossary
Index
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TERMINOLOGY
Access Point—An internet working device that seamlessly connects
wired and wireless networks.
Ad Hoc—An ad hoc wireless LAN is a group of computers, each with
wireless adapters, connected as an independent wireless LAN.
Backbone—The core infrastructure of a network. The portion of the
network that transports information from one central location to another
central location where it is unloaded onto a local system.
Base Station—In mobile telecommunications, a base station is the
central radio transmitter/receiver that maintains communications with the
mobile radiotelephone sets within its range. In cellular and personal
communications applications, each cell or micro-cell has its own base
station; each base station in turn is interconnected with other cells’ bases.
BSS—Basic Service Set. It is an access point and all the LAN PCs that are
associated with it.
CSMA/CA—Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance.
EAP—Extensible Authentication Protocol, which provides a generalized
framework for several different authentication methods.
ESS—Extended Service Set. More than one BSS is configured to become
an ESS. LAN mobile users can roam between different BSSs in an ESS
(ESS-ID, SSID).
Ethernet—A popular local area data communications network, which
accepts transmission from computers and terminals.
Infrastructure—An integrated wireless and wired LAN is called an
infrastructure configuration.
RADIUS—Remote Access Dial-In User Server is an authentication method
used in conjunction with EAP for 802.1x authentication and session
based keys.
Roaming—A wireless LAN mobile user moves around an ESS and
maintains a continuous connection to the infrastructure network.
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RTS Threshold—Transmitters contending for the medium may not be
aware of each other (they are “hidden nodes”). The RTS/CTS mechanism
can solve this problem. If the packet size is smaller than the preset RTS
Threshold size, the RTS/CTS mechanism will not be enabled.
VAP—Virtual Access Point. An access point radio capable of operating as
four separate access points.
VLAN—Virtual Local Area Network. A LAN consisting of groups of hosts
that are on physically different segments but that communicate as
though they were on the same segment.
WEP—Wired Equivalent Privacy is based on the use of security keys and
the popular RC4 encryption algorithm. Wireless devices without a valid
WEP key will be excluded from network traffic.
WDS—Wireless Distribution System.
WPA—Wi-Fi Protected Access.
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 INTRODUCTION
The 3Com Outdoor 11a Building to Building Bridge and 11bg Access Point system
provides point-to-point or point-to-multipoint bridge links between remote
Ethernet LANs, and wireless access point services for clients in the local LAN area.
It includes an integrated high-gain antenna for the 802.11a radio and can
operate as a “Slave” or “Master” bridge in point-to-multipoint configurations, or
provide a high-speed point-to-point wireless link between two sites that can be
up to 15.4 km (9.6 miles) apart. As a “Master” bridge in point-to-multipoint
configurations it can support connections to as many as six “Slave” units. The
802.11b/g radio requires an external antenna option.
The unit is housed in a weatherproof enclosure for mounting outdoors and
includes its own bracket for attaching to a wall, pole, radio mast, or tower
structure. The unit is powered through its Ethernet cable connection from a
power injector module that is installed indoors.
The wireless bridge system offers a fast, reliable, and cost-effective solution for
connectivity between remote Ethernet wired LANs or to provide Internet access to
an isolated site. The system is also easy to install and operate, ideal for situations
where a wired link may be difficult or expensive to deploy. The wireless bridge
connection provides data rates of up to 108 Mbps.
In addition, both wireless bridge models offer full network management
capabilities through an easy-to-use web interface, a command-line interface, and
support for Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) tools.
PRODUCT FEATURES
„
Supports a 5 GHz point-to-point wireless link up 15.4 km (at 6 Mbps data
rate) using the integrated high-gain 17 dBi antenna
„
Supports 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz point-to-multipoint links using various external
antenna options
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
„
Provides access point services for the 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz radios using various
external antenna options
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Maximum data rate up to 108 Mbps on the 802.11a (5 GHz) radio
Outdoor weatherproof design
IEEE 802.11a and 802.11b/g compliant
Local network connection via 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port
Powered through its Ethernet cable connection to the power injector module
Brackets for wall- or pole-mount options
Security through 64/128/152-bit Wired Equivalent Protection (WEP) or 128-bit
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption
„
„
Scans all available channels and selects the best channel and data rate based
on the signal-to-noise ratio
Manageable through an easy-to-use web-browser interface, command line, or
SNMP network management tools
RADIO CHARACTERISTICS
The IEEE 802.11a and 802.11g standards use a radio modulation technique
known as Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM), and a shared
collision domain (CSMA/CA). The 802.11a standard operates in the 5 GHz
Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) band, and the 802.11g
standard in the 2.4 GHz band.
IEEE 802.11g includes backward compatibility with the IEEE 802.11b standard.
IEEE 802.11b also operates at 2.4 GHz, but uses Direct Sequence Spread
Spectrum (DSSS) and Complementary Code Keying (CCK) modulation technology
to achieve a communication rate of up to 11 Mbps.
The wireless bridge provides a 54 Mbps half-duplex connection for each active
channel (up to 108 Mbps in turbo mode on the 802.11a interface).
APPROVED CHANNELS
Use of this product is only authorized for the channels approved by each country.
For proper installation, select your country from the country selection list.
To conform to FCC and other country restrictions your product may be limited in
the channels that are available. If other channels are permitted in your country
please visit the 3Com website for the latest software version.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PACKAGE CHECKLIST
The 3Com Outdoor 11a Building to Building Bridge and 11bg Access Point
package includes:
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
One 3Com Outdoor 11a Building to Building Bridge and 11bg Access Point
Mounting bracket and hardware
One Weatherproof Category 5 network cable
One Weatherproof Console to RS232 cable
PoE power injector/ Ethernet connector and AC power cord
One grounding screw, not attached
One Quick Start Guide
One CD-ROM containing the Setup Wizard software and User’s Manual
One Warranty Flyer
Optional: One N-type RF coaxial cable
Inform your dealer if there are any incorrect, missing or damaged parts. If
possible, retain the carton, including the original packing materials. Use them
again to repack the product in case there is a need to return it.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
Bottom
Water Tight Test Point
(DO NOT REMOVE)
Console Port
Cap Attachment
Console Port with
Protective Cap
Ethernet/PoE
Connector
Grounding
Point
Integrated Antenna
Top View
N-Type External Antenna
Connector (5 GHz)
N-Type External Antenna
Connector (2.4 GHz)
INTEGRATED HIGH-GAIN ANTENNA
The WL-575 bridge includes an integrated high-gain (17 dBi) flat-panel antenna
for 5 GHz operation. With this antenna, in a direct line-of-sight link using a
point-to-point deployment, the range can be as long as 15 km (9.3 miles), with a
6 Mbps data rate.
EXTERNAL ANTENNA OPTIONS
The WL-575 bridge also provides various external antenna options for both 5 GHz
and 2.4 GHz operation. In a point-to-multipoint configuration, an external
high-gain omnidirectional, sector, or high-gain panel antenna can be attached to
communicate with bridges spread over a wide area. The bridge requires a
2.4 GHz external antenna for 802.11b/g operation. The following table
summarizes the external antenna options:
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Antenna Type
Gain (dBi)
Horizontal
HPBW*
(Degrees)
Vertical
HPBW*
(Degrees)
2.4 GHz 5.0 GHz
3CWE591
3Com 6/8 dBi Dual-Band Omni
6
8
360
5GHz: 20
2.4GHz: 30
3Com 18/20 dBi Dual-Band Panel
3Com 8/10 dBi Dual-Band Panel
3CWE596
3CWE598
18
8
20
10
18
60
19
60
* Half-power beam width
External antennas connect to the N-type RF connectors on the wireless bridge
using the optional RF coaxial cables.
Using the external antennas in a point-to-multipoint deployment, the maximum
range for bridge links are:
„
„
802.11b,g: 2.2 km
802.11a: 3 km
ETHERNET PORT
The wireless bridge has one 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 8-pin DIN port that connects
to the power injector module using the included Ethernet cable. The Ethernet
port connection provides power to the wireless bridge as well as a data link to the
local network.
The wireless bridge appears as an Ethernet node and performs a bridging
function by moving packets from the wired LAN to the remote end of the wireless
bridge link.
NOTE: The power injector module does not support Power over Ethernet (PoE)
based on the IEEE 802.3af standard. The wireless bridge unit must always be
powered on by being connected to the power injector module.
POWER INJECTOR MODULE
The wireless bridge receives power through its network cable connection using
power-over-Ethernet technology. A power injector module is included in the
wireless bridge package and provides two RJ-45 Ethernet ports, one for
connecting to the wireless bridge (Output), and the other for connecting to a
local LAN switch (Input).
The Input port uses an MDI (i.e., internal straight-through) pin configuration. You
can therefore use straight-through twisted-pair cable to connect this port to most
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
network interconnection devices such as a switch or router that provide MDI-X
ports. However, when connecting the access point to a workstation or other
device that does not have MDI-X ports, you must use crossover twisted-pair cable.
AC Power Socket
(Hidden)
LED Indicator
Input
Output
Ethernet from Local
Network
Ethernet and Power
to Wireless Bridge
The wireless bridge does not have a power switch. It is powered on when its
Ethernet port is connected to the power injector module, and the power injector
module is connected to an AC power source. The power injector includes one
LED indicator that turns on when AC power is applied.
The power injector module automatically adjusts to any AC voltage between
100-240 volts at 50 or 60 Hz. No voltage range settings are required.
WARNING: The power injector module is designed for indoor use only. Never mount
the power injector outside with the wireless bridge unit.
!
GROUNDING POINT
Even though the wireless bridge includes its own built-in lightning protection, it is
important that the unit is properly connected to ground. A grounding screw is
provided for attaching a ground wire to the unit.
WATER TIGHT TEST POINT
CAUTION: Do not remove or loosen this screw. Doing so could lead to damage
of the unit.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WALL- AND POLE-MOUNTING BRACKET KIT
The wireless bridge includes a bracket kit that can be used to mount the bridge to
a wall, pole, radio mast, or part of a tower structure.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
At each location where a unit is installed, it must be connected to the local
network using the power injector module. The following figure illustrates the
system component connections.
External Antenna
RF Coaxial Cable
Indoor
Outdoor
Wireless Bridge Unit
LAN Switch
Ethernet
Cable
Ethernet Cable
Lightning
Arrestor
Power
Injector
AC Power
Ground Wire
OPERATING MODES
The 3Com Outdoor 11a Building to Building Bridge and 11bg Access Point system
provides access point or bridging services through either the 5 GHz or 2.4 GHz
radio interfaces.
The unit supports both point-to-point and point-to-multipoint bridge modes.
Wireless bridge units can be used as regular 802.11a/b/g access points connected
to a local wired LAN, providing connectivity and roaming services for wireless
clients in an outdoor area. Units can also be used purely as bridges connecting
remote LANs. Alternatively, you can employ both access point and bridging
functions together, offering a flexible and convenient wireless solution for many
applications.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The wireless bridge modes connect two or more wired networks, for example
networks in different buildings with no wired connections. You will need a 3Com
Outdoor 11a Building to Building Bridge and 11bg Access Point unit on both
sides of the connection. The wireless bridge can connect up to six remote
networks.
When using bridge mode on a radio band, only wireless bridge units can
associate to each other. Wireless clients can only associate with the unit using a
radio band set to access point mode.
POINT-TO-POINT CONFIGURATION
Two bridges can form a wireless point-to-point link using their 5 GHz (802.11a)
integrated antennas. A point-to-point configuration can provide a limited data
rate (6 Mbps) link over a long range (up to 15.4 km), or a high data rate (108
Mbps) over a short range (1.3 km).
POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONFIGURATION
A wireless bridge set to “Master” mode can use an omnidirectional antenna to
connect to as many as six bridges in a point-to-multipoint configuration. There
can only be one “Master” unit in the wireless bridge network, all other bridges
must be set as “Slave” units.
The following figure shows a point-to-multipoint “star” configuration with one
bridge set to “Master” and using an omnidirectional antenna.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following figure shows a point-to-multipoint “in-line” configuration with one
bridge set to “Master” and using a directional panel antenna.
19° Beam
Angle
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 BRIDGE LINK PLANNING
The 3Com Outdoor 11a Building to Building Bridge and 11bg Access Point
supports fixed point-to-point or point-to-multipoint wireless links. A single link
between two points can be used to connect a remote site to larger core network.
Multiple bridge links can provide a way to connect widespread Ethernet LANs.
For each link in a wireless bridge network to be reliable and provide optimum
performance, some careful site planning is required. This chapter provides
guidance and information for planning your wireless bridge links.
NOTE: The planning and installation of the wireless bridge requires professional
personnel that are trained in the installation of radio transmitting equipment.
The user is responsible for compliance with local regulations concerning items
such as antenna power, use of lightning arrestors, grounding, and radio mast or
tower construction. Therefore, it is recommended to consult a professional
contractor knowledgeable in local radio regulations prior to equipment
installation.
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DATA RATES
Using the 5.0 GHz integrated antenna, two WL-575 bridges can operate over a
range of up to 15.4 km (9.6 miles) or provide a high-speed connection of
54 Mbps (108 Mbps in turbo mode). However, the maximum data rate for a link
decreases as the operating range increases. A 15.4 km link can only operate up to
6 Mbps, whereas a 108 Mbps connection is limited to a range of 1.3 km.
When you are planning each wireless bridge link, take into account the maximum
distance and data rates for the various antenna options. A summary for 5.0 GHz
(802.11a) antennas is provided in the following table.
.
Distances Achieved Using 17 dBi Integrated Antennas
Data Rate
Distance
15.4 km
14.7 km
14 km
6 Mbps
9 Mbps
12 Mbps
18 Mbps
12.8 km
11.1 km
6.5 km
24 Mbps
36 Mbps
48 Mbps
2.9 km
54 Mbps
1.8 km
12 Mbps Turbo
18 Mbps Turbo
24 Mbps Turbo
36 Mbps Turbo
48 Mbps Turbo
72 Mbps Turbo
96 Mbps Turbo
108 Mbps Turbo
13.4 km
12.8 km
12.2 km
11.1 km
8.2 km
4.6 km
2.1 km
1.3 km
Distances provided in this table are an estimate for a typical
deployment and may be reduced by local regulatory limits.
For accurate distances, you need to calculate the power link
budget for your specific environment.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RADIO PATH PLANNING
Although the wireless bridge uses IEEE 802.11a radio technology, which is
capable of reducing the effect of multipath signals due to obstructions, the
wireless bridge link requires a “radio line-of-sight” between the two antennas for
optimum performance.
The concept of radio line-of-sight involves the area along a radio link path
through which the bulk of the radio signal power travels. This area is known as
the first Fresnel Zone of the radio link. For a radio link not to be affected by
obstacles along its path, no object, including the ground, must intrude within
60% of the first Fresnel Zone.
The following figure illustrates the concept of a good radio line-of-sight.
Radio Line of Sight
Visual Line of Sight
If there are obstacles in the radio path, there may still be a radio link but the
quality and strength of the signal will be affected. Calculating the maximum
clearance from objects on a path is important as it directly affects the decision on
antenna placement and height. It is especially critical for long-distance links,
where the radio signal could easily be lost.
When planning the radio path for a wireless bridge link, consider these factors:
• Avoid any partial line-of-sight between the antennas.
• Be cautious of trees or other foliage that may be near the path, or may grow
and obstruct the path.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Be sure there is enough clearance from buildings and that no building
construction may eventually block the path.
• Check the topology of the land between the antennas using topographical
maps, aerial photos, or even satellite image data (software packages are
available that may include this information for your area)
• Avoid a path that may incur temporary blockage due to the movement of
cars, trains, or aircraft.
ANTENNA HEIGHT
A reliable wireless link is usually best achieved by mounting the antennas at each
end high enough for a clear radio line of sight between them. The minimum
height required depends on the distance of the link, obstacles that may be in the
path, topology of the terrain, and the curvature of the earth (for links over 3
miles).
For long-distance links, a mast or pole may need to be constructed to attain the
minimum required height. Use the following table to estimate the required
minimum clearance above the ground or path obstruction (for 5.0 GHz bridge
links).
.
Max Clearance
for 60% of First
Fresnel Zone at
5.8 GHz
Total Clearance
Required at
Mid-point of
Link
Approximate
Clearance for
Earth Curvature
Total Link
Distance
0.25 mile (402 m)
0.5 mile (805 m)
1 mile (1.6 km)
4.5 ft (1.4 m)
6.4 ft (1.95 m)
9 ft (2.7 m)
0
4.5 ft (1.4 m)
6.4 ft (1.95 m)
9 ft (2.7 m)
0
0
2 miles (3.2 km)
3 miles (4.8 km)
4 miles (6.4 km)
5 miles (8 km)
12.7 ft (3.9 m)
15.6 ft (4.8 m)
18 ft (5.5 m)
20 ft (6.1 m)
24 ft (7.3 m)
27 ft (8.2 m)
31 ft (9.5 m)
35 ft (10.7 m)
37 ft (11.3 m)
0
12.7 ft (3.9 m)
17.4 ft (5.3 m)
21.2 ft (6.5 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)
33.8 ft (10.3 m)
43 ft (13.1 m)
60 ft (18.3 m)
80 ft (24.4 m)
95 ft (29 m)
1.8 ft (0.5 m)
3.2 ft (1.0 m)
5 ft (1.5 m)
9.8 ft (3.0 m)
16 ft (4.9 m)
29 ft (8.8 m)
45 ft (13.7 m)
58 ft (17.7 m)
7 miles (11.3 km)
9 miles (14.5 km)
12 miles (19.3 km)
15 miles (24.1 km)
17 miles (27.4 km)
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note that to avoid any obstruction along the path, the height of the object must
be added to the minimum clearance required for a clear radio line-of-sight.
Consider the following simple example, illustrated in the figure below.
Radio Line of Sight
Visual Line of Sight
3 miles (4.8 km)
5.4 m
B
2.4 m
20 m
1.4 m
9 m
A
17 m
12 m
A wireless bridge link is deployed to connect building A to a building B, which is
located three miles (4.8 km) away. Mid-way between the two buildings is a small
tree-covered hill. From the above table it can be seen that for a three-mile link,
the object clearance required at the mid-point is 5.3 m (17.4 ft). The tree-tops on
the hill are at an elevation of 17 m (56 ft), so the antennas at each end of the link
need to be at least 22.3 m (73 ft) high. Building A is six stories high, or 20 m (66
ft), so a 2.3 m (7.5 ft) mast or pole must be constructed on its roof to achieve the
required antenna height. Building B is only three stories high, or 9 m (30 ft), but is
located at an elevation that is 12 m (39 ft) higher than building A. To mount an
antenna at the required height on building B, a mast or pole of only 1.3 m (4.3 ft)
is needed.
WARNING: Never construct a radio mast, pole, or tower near overhead power
lines.
!
NOTE: Local regulations may limit or prevent construction of a high radio mast
or tower. If your wireless bridge link requires a high radio mast or tower, consult
a professional contractor for advice.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANTENNA POSITION AND ORIENTATION
Once the required antenna height has been determined, other factors affecting
the precise position of the wireless bridge must be considered:
• Be sure there are no other radio antennas within 2 m (6 ft) of the wireless
bridge
• Place the wireless bridge away from power and telephone lines
• Avoid placing the wireless bridge too close to any metallic reflective surfaces,
such as roof-installed air-conditioning equipment, tinted windows, wire
fences, or water pipes
• The wireless bridge antennas at both ends of the link must be positioned
with the same polarization direction, either horizontal or vertical
Antenna Polarization — The wireless bridge’s integrated antenna sends a radio
signal that is polarized in a particular direction. The antenna’s receive sensitivity is
also higher for radio signals that have the same polarization. To maximize the
performance of the wireless link, both antennas must be set to the same
polarization direction. Ideally the antennas should be pointing upwards mounted
on the top part of a pole.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RADIO INTERFERENCE
The avoidance of radio interference is an important part of wireless link planning.
Interference is caused by other radio transmissions using the same or an adjacent
channel frequency. You should first scan your proposed site using a spectrum
analyzer to determine if there are any strong radio signals using the 802.11a
channel frequencies. Always use a channel frequency that is furthest away from
another signal.
If radio interference is still a problem with your wireless bridge link, changing the
antenna polarization direction may improve the situation.
NOTE: For US operation of 5 GHz WDS links, avoid possible radio link disruption
from radar by selecting the following recommended RF channels -- Normal
mode: 49, 153, 157, 161, 165, Turbo mode: 42, 152, 160.
WEATHER CONDITIONS
When planning wireless bridge links, you must take into account any extreme
weather conditions that are known to affect your location. Consider these
factors:
• Temperature — The wireless bridge is tested for normal operation in
temperatures from -40°C to 60°C. Operating in temperatures outside of this
range may cause the unit to fail.
• Wind Velocity — The wireless bridge can operate in winds up to 100 MPH
and survive higher wind speeds up to 150 MPH. You must consider the
known maximum wind velocity and direction at the site and be sure that any
supporting structure, such as a pole, mast, or tower, is built to withstand this
force.
• Lightning — The wireless bridge includes its own built-in lightning
protection. However, you should make sure that the unit, any supporting
structure, and cables are all properly grounded. Additional protection using
lightning rods, lightning arrestors, or surge suppressors may also be
employed.
• Rain — The wireless bridge is weatherproofed against rain. Also, prolonged
heavy rain has no significant effect on the radio signal. However, it is
recommended to apply weatherproof sealing tape around the Ethernet port
and antenna connectors for extra protection. If moisture enters a connector,
it may cause a degradation in performance or even a complete failure of the
link.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Snow and Ice — Falling snow, like rain, has no significant effect on the
radio signal. However, a build up of snow or ice on antennas may cause the
link to fail. In this case, the snow or ice has to be cleared from the antennas
to restore operation of the link.
ETHERNET CABLING
When a suitable antenna location has been determined, you must plan a cable
route form the wireless bridge outdoors to the power injector module indoors.
Consider these points:
• The Ethernet cable length should never be longer than 100 m (328 ft)
• Determine a building entry point for the cable
• Determine if conduits, bracing, or other structures are required for safety or
protection of the cable
• For lightning protection at the power injector end of the cable, use a
lightning arrestor immediately before the Ethernet cable enters the building
GROUNDING
It is important that the wireless bridge, cables, and any supporting structures are
properly grounded. The wireless bridge unit includes a grounding screw for
attaching a ground wire. Be sure that grounding is available and that it meets
local and national electrical codes.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 HARDWARE INSTALLATION
Before mounting antennas to set up your wireless bridge links, be sure you have
selected appropriate locations for each antenna. Follow the guidance and
information in Chapter 2, “Wireless Link Planning.”
Also, before mounting units in their intended locations, you should first perform
initial configuration and test the basic operation of the wireless bridge links in a
controlled environment over a very short range. (See the section “Testing Basic
Link Operation” in this chapter.)
The wireless bridge includes its own bracket kit for mounting the unit to a 1.5 to
2 inch diameter steel pole or tube. The pole-mounting bracket allows the unit to
be mounted to part of a radio mast or tower structure. The unit also has a
wall-mounting bracket kit that enables it to be fixed to a building wall or roof
when using external antennas.
Hardware installation of the wireless bridge involves these steps:
1
2
Mount the unit on a wall, pole, mast, or tower using the mounting bracket.
Mount external antennas on the same supporting structure as the bridge and
connect them to the bridge unit.
3
4
Connect the Ethernet cable and a grounding wire to the unit.
Connect the power injector to the Ethernet cable, a local LAN switch, and an
AC power source.
5
Align antennas at both ends of the link.
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TESTING BASIC LINK OPERATION
Set up the units over a very short range (15 to 25 feet), either outdoors or
indoors. Connect the units as indicated in this chapter and be sure to perform all
the basic configuration tasks outlined in Chapter 4, “Initial Configuration.” When
you are satisfied that the links are operating correctly, proceed to mount the units
in their intended locations.
MOUNT THE UNIT
The bridge can be mounted on the following types of surfaces:
„
„
Pole
Wall
CAUTION: The bridge is intended for outdoor use only. Do not install the bridge
indoors.
!
USING THE POLE-MOUNTING BRACKET
Perform the following steps to mount the unit to a 1.5 to 2 inch diameter steel
pole or tube using the mounting bracket:
1
Place the V-shaped part of the bracket around the pole and tighten the
securing nuts just enough to hold the bracket to the pole. (The bracket may
need to be rotated around the pole during the antenna alignment process.)
Attach V-shaped
parts to pole with
provided nuts and
bolts
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Fit the edges of the V-shaped part into the slots in the rectangular plate, and
tighten the nuts.
Fit the edges of
the V-shaped
part into the slots
3
Attach the adjustable rectangular plate to the bridge with supplied screws.
Attach the
adjustable
rectangular plate
to the bridge
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Attach the bridge with bracket to the plate already fixed to the pole.
Attach the bridge
to the plate on
the pole
5
Use the included nuts to secure the wireless bridge to the pole bracket. Note
that the wireless bridge tilt angle may need to be adjusted during the
antenna alignment process.
Be sure to take account of the antenna polarization direction; all antennas in
a link must be mounted with the same polarization.
USING THE WALL-MOUNTING BRACKET
Perform the following steps to mount the unit to a wall using the wall-mounting
bracket:
CAUTION: The wall-mounting bracket does not allow the wireless bridge’s
intrgrated antenna to be aligned. It is intended for use with the unit using an
external antenna.
!
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Always attach the bracket to a wall with flat side flush against the wall (see
following figure).
2
3
4
Position the bracket in the intended location and mark the position of the
four mounting screw holes.
Drill four holes in the wall that match the screws and wall plugs included in
the bracket kit, then secure the bracket to the wall.
Use the included nuts to tightly secure the wireless bridge to the bracket.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECT EXTERNAL ANTENNAS
The bridge’s primary antenna is it’s built-in internal antenna. For some
applications when deploying an WL-575 unit for a bridge link or access point
operation, you may need to mount external antennas and connect them to the
bridge. Typically, a bridge link requires a 5.0 GHz antenna, and access point
operation a 2.4 GHz antenna. WL-575 units acting as managed APs also require
an external antenna for 2.4 GHz operation.
Perform these steps:
1
Mount the external antenna to the same supporting structure as the bridge,
within 3 m (10 ft) distance, using the bracket supplied in the antenna
package.
2
3
Connect the antenna to the bridge’s N-type connector using the RF coaxial
cable provided in the antenna package.
Apply weatherproofing tape to the antenna connectors to help prevent water
entering the connectors.
2.4 GHz
2.4 GHz
5 GHz
N-type Connector
N-type Connector
N-type Connector
5 GHz External
High-gain Panel
Antenna
2.4 GHz External
Omnidirectional
Antenna
RF Coaxial Cable
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECT CABLES TO THE UNIT
WARNING: Do not connect or disconnect cables or otherwise work with the
bridge during periods of lightning activity.
!
1
2
Attach the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the wireless bridge.
For extra protection against rain or moisture, apply weatherproofing tape (not
included) around the Ethernet connector.
3
4
Be sure to ground the unit with an appropriate grounding wire (not included)
by attaching it to the grounding screw on the unit.
Be sure to install a lightning arrestor on the Ethernet cable between the
bridge and power injector. The lightning arrestor should be placed outdoors,
immediately before the Ethernet cable enters the building.
CAUTION: Be sure that grounding is available and that it meets local and national
electrical codes.
!
Console Port
PoE (Ethernet) Port
Ground Wire
Grounding Screw
Ethernet Cable
CONNECT THE POWER INJECTOR
To connect the wireless bridge to a power source:
CAUTION: Do not install the power injector outdoors. The unit is for indoor
installation only.
!
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE: The wireless bridge’s Ethernet port does not support Power over Ethernet
(PoE) based on the IEEE 802.3af standard. Do not try to power the unit by
connecting it directly to a network switch that provides IEEE 802.3af PoE. Always
connect the unit to the included power injector module.
1
Connect the Ethernet cable from the wireless bridge to the RJ-45 port labeled
“Output” on the power injector.
2
Connect a straight-through unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable from a local
LAN switch to the RJ-45 port labeled “Input” on the power injector. Use
Category 5e or better UTP cable for 10/100BASE-TX connections.
NOTE: The RJ-45 port on the power injector is an MDI port. If connecting
directly to a computer for testing the link, use a crossover cable.
AC power
Ethernet cable
from LAN Switch
Input
Output
Power LED indicator
Input
Output
Ethernet cable to
wireless bridge
1
2
Insert the power cable plug directly into the standard AC receptacle on the
power injector.
Plug the other end of the power cable into a grounded, 3-pin socket, AC
power source.
NOTE: For International use, you may need to change the AC line cord. You
must use a line cord set that has been approved for the receptacle type in your
country.
3
Check the LED on top of the power injector to be sure that power is being
supplied to the wireless bridge through the Ethernet connection.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK THE LED INDICATORS
The bridge’s 11a and 11b/g LEDs operate in two display modes, which are
configurable through the software. The default AP mode indicates data traffic
rates. The RSSI mode indicates the received signal power and is for use when
aligning antennas in a bridge link.
When the bridge is connected to power, the LEDs indicate as follows:
LED
Color
Indicates
Power
Green
The bridge is powered up and operating
normally.
Off
The bridge is not receiving power or
there is a fault with the power supply.
Amber
Green
The system is under cold reset status.
Link
The bridge has a 10/100 Mbps Fast
Ethernet connection, but there is no
activity.
Flashing Indicates that the bridge is transmitting
or receiving data on a 10/100 Mbps
Ethernet LAN. Flashing rate is
proportional to network activity.
Off
No link is present or the Ethernet LAN
port is disabled.
11a
(Three
LEDs)
Green
and
Flashing
The 802.11a 5.3 GHz radio is enabled.
RSSI Mode:
One fully lit LED indicates a low RSSI
output level, two LEDs.a medium
level, and three LEDs the maximum
level.
A flashing LED indicates an
intermediate RSSI output level
AP Mode:
One fully lit LED indicates a low
traffic rate, two LEDs.a medium rate,
and three LEDs the maximum rate.
A flashing LED indicates an
intermediate traffic rate level
Off
No link is present or the 802.11a radio is
disabled.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LED
Color
Indicates
11g
(Three
LEDs)
Amber
and
Flashing
The 802.11g 2.4 GHz radio is enabled.
RSSI Mode:
One fully lit LED indicates a low RSSI
output level, two LEDs.a medium
level, and three LEDs the maximum
level.
A flashing LED indicates an
intermediate RSSI output level
AP Mode:
One fully lit LED indicates a low
traffic rate, two LEDs.a medium rate,
and three LEDs the maximum rate.
A flashing LED indicates an
intermediate traffic rate level
Off
No link is present or the 802.11g radio
is disabled.
ALIGN ANTENNAS
After wireless bridge units have been mounted, connected, and their radios are
operating, bridge link antennas must be accurately aligned to ensure optimum
performance. This alignment process is particularly important for long-range
point-to-point links. In a point-to-multipoint configuration the root bridge uses an
omnidirectional or sector antenna, which does not require alignment, but bridge
nodes still need to be correctly aligned with the root bridge antenna.
„
Point-to-Point Configurations – In a point-to-point configuration, the
alignment process requires two people, one at each end of the link. The use of
cell phones or two-way radio communication may help with coordination. To
start, you can just point the antennas at each other, using binoculars or a
compass to set the general direction. For accurate alignment, you must
monitor the signal strength LEDs as the antenna moves horizontally and
vertically.
„
Point-to-Multipoint Configurations – In a point-to-multipoint
configuration all bridge nodes must be aligned with the root bridge antenna.
The alignment process is the same as in point-to-point links, but only the
bridge node end of the link requires the alignment.
The signal strength LEDs indicate the received radio signal strength for a particular
bridge link. The more LEDs that turn on, the stronger the signal. Alternatively, you
can monitor the Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value directly from the
management interface. The higher the RSSI value, the stronger the signal.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you move the antenna during alignment, the radio signal from the remote
antenna can be seen to have a strong central main lobe and smaller side lobes.
The object of the alignment process is to set the antenna so that it is receiving the
strongest signal from the central main lobe.
Vertical Scan
Remote
Antenna
Maximum Signal
Strength Position for
Vertical Alignment
Horizontal Scan
Main Lobe
Maximum
RSSI Voltage
RSSI
Voltage
Side Lobe
Maximum
Maximum Signal Strength Position
for Horizontal Alignment
To align the antennas in the link, monitor the signal strength LEDs or the RSSI
value in the management interface. Start with one antenna fixed and then
perform the following procedure on the other antenna:
NOTE: The RSSI output can be configured through management interfaces to
output a value for specific WDS ports. See page 6-40 for more information.
11b/g
11a
Power
Link
High 11a Signal
Medium 11a Signal
Low 11a Signal
11b/g
11a
Power
Link
11b/g
11a
Power
Link
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
Pan the antenna horizontally back and forth while checking the LEDs. If using
the pole-mounting bracket with the unit, you must rotate the mounting
bracket around the pole. Other external antenna brackets may require a
different horizontal adjustment.
Find the point where the signal is strongest (all LEDs on) and secure the
horizontal adjustment in that position.
NOTE: Sometimes there may not be a central lobe peak in the voltage because
vertical alignment is too far off; only two similar peaks for the side lobes are
detected. In this case, fix the antenna so that it is halfway between the two
peaks.
3
Loosen the vertical adjustment on the mounting bracket and tilt the antenna
slowly up and down while checking the LEDs.
4
Find the point where the signal is strongest and secure the vertical adjustment
in that position.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 INITIAL CONFIGURATION
The 3Com Outdoor 11a Building to Building Bridge and 11bg Access Point offers
a variety of management options, including a web-based interface.
The initial configuration steps can be made through the web browser interface.
The access point requests an IP address via DHCP by default. If no response is
received from the DHCP server, then the access point uses the default address
169.254.2.1.
If the default AP configuration does not meet your network requirements, or if
you want to customize the settings for your own network, you can use these
tools to change the configuration:
1
2
Launch the 3Com Wireless Infrastructure Device Manager (Widman) utility
Directly connect to the device through it’s Ethernet port or console port
NETWORKS WITH A DHCP SERVER
If your network has a DHCP server, an IP address is automatically assigned to the
AP. It takes between one and two minutes for the Access Point to determine if
there is a DHCP server on the network. Use the 3Com Wireless Infrastructure
Device Manager (Widman) included on the 3Com Installation CD to locate the
Access Point on the network and view its IP address. After you determine the AP’s
IP address, you can enter that IP address into a web browser on a computer on
the same subnet to view the Access Point’s system status or change its
configuration.
NETWORKS WITHOUT A DHCP SERVER
If your network does not have a DHCP server, the Access Point uses a factory
assigned IP address (169.254.2.1). You can use that IP address to configure the
Access Point, or you can assign a new IP address to the Access Point. To verify that
the Access Point is using the default IP address assigned at the factory:
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 4: INITIAL CONFIGURATION
1
2
Connect a computer directly to the Access Point using the supplied standard
Category 5 UTP Ethernet cable.
Enter the Access Point’s default IP address (169.254.2.1) into the computer’s
web browser. If the Configuration Management System starts, the Access
Point is using the factory assigned IP address. You can configure the Access
Point with the following login information:
„
Login name: admin
Password: password
„
If the Configuration Management System does not start, the Access Point is
on a different subnet than the computer. Install and start the 3Com Wireless
Infrastructure Device Manager to discover the Access Point’s IP address.
USING THE 3COM INSTALLATION CD
The 3Com Installation CD contains the following tools and utilities: 3Com
Wireless Infrastructure Device Manager-an administration tool that helps you
select 3Com wireless LAN devices and launch their configurations in your Web
browser.
LAUNCH THE 3COM WIRELESS INFRASTRUCTURE DEVICE
MANAGER (WIDMAN) UTILITY
1
2
Turn on the computer.
Insert the 3Com Installation CD into the CD-ROM drive.
The CD will Autorun. If it does not Autorun, you can start the setup menu
from the Windows Start menu. For example: Start > Run > d: setup.exe.
3
4
5
In the menu, click Tools and Utilities.
In the next screen, click the software you want to install.
Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation.
Reboot the computer if prompted to do so.
LAUNCHING THE 3COM WIRELESS INTERFACE DEVICE MANAGER
To be able to configure the Access Point you need to run the Wireless Interface
Device Manager. Go to Start > Programs > 3Com Wireless > Wireless
Interface Device Manager.
If the device is working correctly the following screen should be seen.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 1 Wireless Interface Device Manager
Click on the Properties button to see the following screen
Figure 2 Wireless Interface Device Manager - Properties
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 4: INITIAL CONFIGURATION
Directly connect to the device through its Ethernet port or console port.
Follow the instructions below to login into the AP Configuration screen:
1
2
Load a web browser and enter <http://169.254.2.1>.
The Logon screen appears.
To log on to the Web interface:
1
2
3
Username, type admin (case sensitive).
Password, type password
Click Log On.
FIRST TIME ONLY
When you log in for the first time, you may be asked to select your country.
Choose your country from the drop-down list and then click Apply.
Click on the Setup Wizard for initial configuration.
For a new access point installation, the default WLAN Service Area (ESSID) is
3Com and no security is set. Unless it detects a DHCP server on the network, the
access point uses Auto IP to assign an IP address of the form 169.254.2.1.
Use the 3Com Wireless Infrastructure Device Manager to locate 3Com Wireless
LAN devices and launch their configurations. When installing the device manager,
make sure the computer is connected to the same network as the device to be
configured. After installing and launching the device manager, select the device
to be configured from network tree and click Configure to launch the
configuration Web interface.
USING THE SETUP WIZARD
There are only a few basic steps you need to complete to connect the access
point to your corporate network and provide network access to wireless clients.
The Setup Wizard takes you through configuration procedures for the wireless
Service Set Identifier, the radio channel selection, IP configuration and basic
authentication for wireless clients.
The access point can be managed by any computer using a web browser (such as
Internet Explorer 5.0 or above). Enter the default IP address: http://169.254.2.1.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Setup Wizard
use that address instead of the one shown here.
Logging In – Enter the username “admin,” and password “password,” then
click LOGIN. For information on configuring a user name and password, see page
23.
Figure 3 Login Page
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 4: INITIAL CONFIGURATION
The home page displays the Main Menu.
Figure 4 Home Page
Launching the Setup Wizard – To perform initial configuration, click Setup
Wizard on the home page, select the VAP you wish to configure, then click on the
[Next] button to start the process.
Figure 5 Setup Wizard - Start
1
Service Set ID – Enter the service set identifier in the SSID box which all
wireless clients must use to associate with the access point. The SSID is case
sensitive and can consist of up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Setup Wizard
Figure 6 Setup Wizard - Step 1
2
Radio Channel – You must enable radio communications for 802.11a and
802.11b/g, and set the operating radio channel.
NOTE: Available channel settings are limited by local regulations, which determine
the channels that are available. This User Guide shows channels and settings that
apply to North America (United States and Canada), with 13 channels available for
the 802.11a interface and 11 channels for the 802.11g interface. Other regions my
have different channels and settings available.
Figure 7 Setup Wizard - Step 2
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 4: INITIAL CONFIGURATION
„
802.11a
Turbo Mode – If you select Enable, the access point will operate
in turbo mode with a data rate of up to 108 Mbps. Normal
mode support 13 channels, Turbo mode supports only 5
channels. (Default: Disabled)
802.11a Radio Channel – Set the operating radio channel
number. (Default: 60ch, 5.300 GHz)
Auto Channel Select – Select Enable for automatic radio
channel detection. (Default: Enabled)
„
802.11b/g
Turbo Mode - If you select Enable, the access point will operate in
turbo mode with a data rate of up to 108 Mbps. Normal mode support
11 channels, Turbo mode supports only 1 channel. (Default: Disabled)
802.11g Radio Channel - Set the operating radio channel number.
(Range 1-11; Default: 1)
3
IP Configuration – Either enable or disable Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) for automatic IP configuration. If you
disable DHCP, then manually enter the IP address and subnet mask. If
a management station exists on another network segment, then you must
enter the IP address for a gateway that can route traffic between these
segments. Then enter the IP address for the primary and secondary Domain
Name Servers (DNS) servers to be used for host-name to IP address resolution.
Figure 8 Setup Wizard - Step 3
DHCP Client – With DHCP Client enabled, the IP address, subnet mask and
default gateway can be dynamically assigned to the access point by the
network DHCP server. (Default: Disabled)
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Setup Wizard
NOTE: If there is no DHCP server on your network, then the access point will
automatically start up with its default IP address, 169.254.2.1.
4
Security – Set the Authentication Type to “Open” to allow open access
without authentication, or “Shared” to require authentication based on a
shared key. Enable encryption to encrypt data transmissions. To configure
other security features use the Advanced Setup menu as described in
Chapter 4.
Figure 9 Setup Wizard - Step 4
Authentication Type – Use “Open System” to allow open access to all wireless
clients without performing authentication, or “Shared Key” to perform
authentication based on a shared key that has been distributed to all stations.
(Default: Open System)
WEP – Wired Equivalent Privacy is used to encrypt transmissions passing
between wireless clients and the access point. (Default: Disabled)
Shared Key Setup – If you select “Shared Key” authentication, enable WEP,
then configure the shared key by selecting 64-bit or 128-bit key type and
entering a hexadecimal or ASCII string of the appropriate length. The key can
be entered as alphanumeric characters or hexadecimal (0~9, A~F, e.g., D7 0A
9C 7F E5). (Default: 128 bit, hexadecimal key type)
64-Bit Manual Entry: The key can contain 10 hexadecimal digits, or 5
alphanumeric characters.
128-Bit Manual Entry: The key can contain 26 hexadecimal digits or 13
alphanumeric characters.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 4: INITIAL CONFIGURATION
NOTE: All wireless devices must be configured with the same Key ID values to
communicate with the access point.
5
6
Click Finish.
Click the OK button to complete the wizard.
Figure 10 Setup Wizard - Completed
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Before continuing with advanced configuration, first complete the initial
configuration steps described in Chapter 4 to set up an IP address for the access
point.
The access point can be managed by any computer using a web browser (such as
Internet Explorer 5.0 or above). Enter the configured IP address of the access
point, or use the default address: http://169.254.2.1.
To log into the access point, enter the default user name “admin” and the
password “password,” then press “LOGIN.”
For a new access point installation, the default WLAN Service Area (ESSID) is
3Com and no security is set. Unless it detects a DHCP server on the network, the
access point uses Auto IP to assign an IP address of the form 169.254.2.1.
Use the 3Com Wireless Infrastructure Device Manager to locate 3Com Wireless
LAN devices and launch their configurations. When installing the device manager,
make sure the computer is connected to the same network as the device to be
configured. After installing and launching the device manager, select the device
to be configured from network tree and click Configure to launch the
configuration Web interface.
When the home page displays, click on Advanced Setup. The following page will
display.
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Figure 11 Advanced Setup
The information in this chapter is organized to reflect the structure of the web
screens for easy reference. However, it is recommended that you configure a user
name and password as the first step under Administration to control
management access to this device (page 5-23).
ADVANCED SETUP
The Advanced Setup pages include the following options.
Table 1 Advanced Setup
Menu
Description
Page
5-4
System
Configures basic administrative and client access
Specifies the host name
Identification
5-4
TCP / IP Settings
Configures the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and domain
name servers
5-5
RADIUS
Configures the RADIUS server for wireless client authentication
and accounting
5-8
5-10
5-15
Authentication
Filter Control
Configures 802.1X client authentication, with an option for MAC
address authentication
Filters communications between wireless clients, access to the
management interface from wireless clients, and traffic matching
specific Ethernet protocol types
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup
Menu
Description
Page
SNMP
Configures SNMP settings
5-19
Administration
Configures user name and password for management access;
upgrades software from local file, FTP or TFTP server; resets
configuration settings to factory defaults; and resets the access
point
5-23
WDS/STP Settings
Syslog Set-up
Configures WDS bridging and Spanning Tree Protocol features
5-28
5-33
Controls logging of error messages; sets the system clock via SNTP
server or manual configuration
RSSI
Configures RSSI value display, bridge link distance, and LED display
mode
5-35
Status
Displays information about the access point and wireless clients
5-60
5-60
AP Status
Displays configuration settings for the basic system and the
wireless interface
Station Status
Shows the wireless clients currently associated with the access
point
5-61
Event Logs
Shows log messages stored in memory
Configures the IEEE 802.11a interface
5-62
5-37
5-38
802.11a Interface
Radio Settings
Configures common radio signal parameters and other settings
for each VAP interface
Security
Enables each virtual access point (VAP) interface, sets the Service
Set Identifier (SSID), and configures wireless security
5-50
802.11b/g Interface
Radio Settings
Configures the IEEE 802.11g interface
5-37
5-43
Configures common radio signal parameters and other settings
for each VAP interface
Security
Enables each VAP interface, sets the SSID, and configures wireless
security
5-50
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
The system name for the access point can be left at its default setting. However,
modifying this parameter can help you to more easily distinguish different devices
in your network.
Figure 12 System Identification
System Name – An alias for the access point, enabling the device to be uniquely
identified on the network. (Default: Enterprise Wireless AP; Range: 1-32
characters)
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCP / IP Settings
TCP / IP SETTINGS
Configuring the access point with an IP address expands your ability to manage
the access point. A number of access point features depend on IP addressing to
operate.
NOTE: You can use the web browser interface to access IP addressing only if the
access point already has an IP address that is reachable through your network.
By default, the access point will be automatically configured with IP settings from
a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. Use 3Com Wireless
Infrastructure Device Manager to discover or set the initial IP address of the unit.
WIDMAN will allow you to launch a web browser on the Access Point's web
management interface by selecting the Access Point and the configure button.
NOTE: If there is no DHCP server on your network, or DHCP fails, the access point
will automatically start up with a default IP address of 169.254.2.1.
Figure 13 TCP/IP Settings
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
DHCP Client (Enable) – Select this option to obtain the IP settings for the access
point from a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server. The IP address,
subnet mask, default gateway, and Domain Name Server (DNS) address are
dynamically assigned to the access point by the network DHCP server.
(Default: Enabled)
DHCP Client (Disable) – Select this option to manually configure a static address
for the access point.
„
„
„
IP Address: The IP address of the access point. Valid IP addresses consist of four
decimal numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.
Subnet Mask: The mask that identifies the host address bits used for routing to
specific subnets.
Default Gateway: The default gateway is the IP address of the router for the
access point, which is used if the requested destination address is not on the
local subnet.
If you have management stations, DNS, RADIUS, or other network servers
located on another subnet, type the IP address of the default gateway router in
the text field provided. Otherwise, leave the address as all zeros (0.0.0.0).
„
Primary and Secondary DNS Address: The IP address of Domain Name Servers
on the network. A DNS maps numerical IP addresses to domain names and can
be used to identify network hosts by familiar names instead of the IP addresses.
If you have one or more DNS servers located on the local network, type the IP
addresses in the text fields provided. Otherwise, leave the addresses as all zeros
(0.0.0.0).
Web Servers – Allows monitoring of the access point from a browser and secure
connection.
„
HTTP Server: Allows the access point to be monitored or configured from a
browser.
„
„
„
HTTP Port: Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface.
HTTPS Server: Enables the secure HTTP server on the access point.
HTTPS Port: Specifies the UDP port number used for a secure HTTP connection
to the access point’s Web interface.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCP / IP Settings
Figure 14 Smart Monitor
By enabling Smart Monitor (known as Link Integrity in the CLI) and setting a
target IP address, the AP will periodically (set by the ping interval) check to see if
the target address responds to pings. If it fails to respond to a ping after the
configured number of retries, it will disable both radios so that no clients can
connect to the AP.
This is used to disable the AP when it cannot not reach a critical network element
such as the RADIUS server, VPN Terminator, Mail Server etc.
„
Disable / Enable: Disables or enables a link check to a host device on the wired
network.
„
„
„
Target IP address: Specifies the IP address of a host device in the wired network.
Enable: Enables traffic between the host’s IP address and the AP.
Ping Interval: Specifies the time between each Ping sent to the link host.
(Range:300~30000 milliseconds; Default: 30 milliseconds)
„
Number of Retries allowed: Specifies the number of consecutive failed Ping
counts before the link is determined as lost. (Range:1~30; Default:6)
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is an authentication protocol
that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS-aware
devices on the network. An authentication server contains a database of user
credentials for each user that requires access to the network.
A primary RADIUS server must be specified for the access point to implement IEEE
802.1X network access control and Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) wireless
security. A secondary RADIUS server may also be specified as a backup should the
primary server fail or become inaccessible.
In addition, the configured RADIUS server can also act as a RADIUS Accounting
server and receive user-session accounting information from the access point.
RADIUS Accounting can be used to provide valuable information on user activity
in the network.
NOTE: This guide assumes that you have already configured RADIUS server(s) to
support the access point. Configuration of RADIUS server software is beyond the
scope of this guide, refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS server
software.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RADIUS
Figure 15 RADIUS Authentication
Primary Radius Server Setup – Configure the following settings to use RADIUS
authentication on the access point.
„
„
IP Address: Specifies the IP address or host name of the RADIUS server.
Port: The UDP port number used by the RADIUS server for authentication
messages. (Range: 1024-65535; Default: 1812)
„
Key: A shared text string used to encrypt messages between the access point
and the RADIUS server. Be sure that the same text string is specified on the
RADIUS server. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 255
characters)
„
„
Timeout: Number of seconds the access point waits for a reply from the
RADIUS server before resending a request. (Range: 1-60 seconds; Default: 5)
Retransmit attempts: The number of times the access point tries to resend a
request to the RADIUS server before authentication fails. (Range: 1-30;
Default: 3)
NOTE: For the Timeout and Retransmit attempts fields, accept the default values
unless you experience problems connecting to the RADIUS server over the
network.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Secondary Radius Server Setup – Configure a secondary RADIUS server to provide
a backup in case the primary server fails. The access point uses the secondary
server if the primary server fails or becomes inaccessible. Once the access point
switches over to the secondary server, it periodically attempts to establish
communication again with primary server. If communication with the primary
server is re-established, the secondary server reverts to a backup role.
VLAN ID Format – A VLAN ID (a number between 1 and 4094) can be assigned to
each client after successful authentication using IEEE 802.1X and a central
RADIUS server. The user VLAN IDs must be configured on the RADIUS server for
each user authorized to access the network. VLAN IDs can be entered as
hexadecimal numbers or as ASCII strings.
AUTHENTICATION
Wireless clients can be authenticated for network access by checking their MAC
address against the local database configured on the access point, or by using a
database configured on a central RADIUS server. Alternatively, authentication can
be implemented using the IEEE 802.1X network access control protocol.
A client’s MAC address provides relatively weak user authentication, since MAC
addresses can be easily captured and used by another station to break into the
network. Using 802.1X provides more robust user authentication using user
names and passwords or digital certificates. You can configure the access point to
use both MAC address and 802.1X authentication, with client station MAC
authentication occurring prior to IEEE 802.1X authentication. However, it is better
to choose one or the other, as appropriate.
IEEE 802.1X is a standard framework for network access control that uses a
central RADIUS server for user authentication. This control feature prevents
unauthorized access to the network by requiring an 802.1X client application to
submit user credentials for authentication. The 802.1X standard uses the
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to pass user credentials (either digital
certificates, user names and passwords, or other) from the client to the RADIUS
server. Client authentication is then verified on the RADIUS server before the
access point grants client access to the network.
The 802.1X EAP packets are also used to pass dynamic unicast session keys and
static broadcast keys to wireless clients. Session keys are unique to each client and
are used to encrypt and correlate traffic passing between a specific client and the
access point. You can also enable broadcast key rotation, so the access point
provides a dynamic broadcast key and changes it at a specified interval.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Authentication
The access point can also operate in a 802.1X supplicant mode. This enables the
access point itself to be authenticated with a RADIUS server using a configured
MD5 user name and password. This prevents rogue access points from gaining
access to the network.
Take note of the following points before configuring MAC address or 802.1X
authentication:
„
Use MAC address authentication for a small network with a limited number of
users. MAC addresses can be manually configured on the access point itself
without the need to set up a RADIUS server, but managing a large number of
MAC addresses across many access points is very cumbersome. A RADIUS
server can be used to centrally manage a larger database of user MAC
addresses.
„
Use IEEE 802.1X authentication for networks with a larger number of users and
where security is the most important issue. When using 802.1X authentication,
a RADIUS server is required in the wired network to centrally manage the
credentials of the wireless clients. It also provides a mechanism for enhanced
network security using dynamic encryption key rotation or W-Fi Protected
Access (WPA).
NOTE: If you configure RADIUS MAC authentication together with 802.1X,
RADIUS MAC address authentication is performed prior to 802.1X authentication.
If RADIUS MAC authentication succeeds, then 802.1X authentication is
performed. If RADIUS MAC authentication fails, 802.1X authentication is not
performed.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Figure 16 Authentication
MAC Authentication – You can configure a list of the MAC addresses for wireless
clients that are authorized to access the network. This provides a basic level of
authentication for wireless clients attempting to gain access to the network. A
database of authorized MAC addresses can be stored locally on the access point
or remotely on a central RADIUS server.
(Default: Disabled)
„
„
Disabled: No checks are performed on an associating station’s MAC address.
Local MAC: The MAC address of the associating station is compared against
the local database stored on the access point. Use the Local MAC
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Authentication
Authentication section of this web page to set up the local database, and
MAC address database.
„
Radius MAC: The MAC address of the associating station is sent to a configured
RADIUS server for authentication. When using a RADIUS authentication server
Radius window (see “RADIUS” on page 8). The database of MAC addresses
and filtering policy must be defined in the RADIUS server.
NOTE: MAC addresses on the RADIUS server can be entered in four different
formats (see “RADIUS” on page 8).
You can enable 802.1X as optionally supported or as required to enhance the
security of the wireless network. (Default: Disable)
„
Disable: The access point does not support 802.1X authentication for any
wireless client. After successful wireless association with the access point, each
client is allowed to access the network.
„
Supported: The access point supports 802.1X authentication only for clients
initiating the 802.1X authentication process (i.e., the access point does not
initiate 802.1X authentication). For clients initiating 802.1X, only those
successfully authenticated are allowed to access the network. For those clients
not initiating 802.1X, access to the network is allowed after successful wireless
association with the access point. The 802.1X supported mode allows access
for clients not using WPA or WPA2 security.
„
Required: The access point enforces 802.1X authentication for all associated
point will initiate authentication. Only those clients successfully authenticated
with 802.1X are allowed to access the network.
NOTE: If 802.1X is enabled on the access point, then RADIUS setup must be
completed (See “RADIUS” on page 8.)
When 802.1X is enabled, the broadcast and session key rotation intervals can also
be configured.
„
Broadcast Key Refresh Rate: Sets the interval at which the broadcast keys are
refreshed for stations using 802.1X dynamic keying. (Range: 0-1440 minutes;
Default: 0 means disabled)
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
„
„
Session Key Refresh Rate: The interval at which the access point refreshes
unicast session keys for associated clients. (Range: 0-1440 minutes; Default: 0
means disabled)
802.1X Reauthentication Refresh Rate: The time period after which a
connected client must be re-authenticated. During the re-authentication
process of verifying the client’s credentials on the RADIUS server, the client
remains connected the network. Only if re-authentication fails is network
access blocked. (Range: 0-65535 seconds; Default: 0 means disabled)
802.1X Supplicant – The access point can also operate in a 802.1X supplicant
mode. This enables the access point itself to be authenticated with a RADIUS
server using a configured MD5 user name and password. This prevents rogue
access points from gaining access to the network.
Local MAC Authentication – Configures the local MAC authentication database.
The MAC database provides a mechanism to take certain actions based on a
wireless client’s MAC address. The MAC list can be configured to allow or deny
network access to specific clients.
„
System Default: Specifies a default action for all unknown MAC addresses (that
is, those not listed in the local MAC database).
• Deny: Blocks access for all MAC addresses except those listed in the local
database as “Allow.”
• Allow: Permits access for all MAC addresses except those listed in the local
database as “Deny.”
„
MAC Authentication Settings: Enters specified MAC addresses and permissions
into the local MAC database.
• MAC Address: Physical address of a client. Enter six pairs of hexadecimal
digits separated by hyphens; for example, 00-90-D1-12-AB-89.
• Permission: Select Allow to permit access or Deny to block access. If Delete
is selected, the specified MAC address entry is removed from the database.
• Update: Enters the specified MAC address and permission setting into the
local database.
„
MAC Authentication Table: Displays current entries in the local MAC database.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filter Control
FILTER CONTROL
The access point can employ network traffic frame filtering to control access to
network resources and increase security. You can prevent communications
between wireless clients and prevent access point management from wireless
clients. Also, you can block specific Ethernet traffic from being forwarded by the
access point.
Figure 17 Filter Control
Inter Client STAs Communication Filter – Sets the global mode for
wireless-to-wireless communications between clients associated to Virtual AP
(VAP) interfaces on the access point. (Default: Prevent Inter and Intra VAP client
Communication)
„
Disabled: All clients can communicate with each other through the access
point.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
„
„
Prevent Intra VAP client communication: When enabled, clients associated
with a specific VAP interface cannot establish wireless communications with
each other. Clients can communicate with clients associated to other VAP
interfaces.
Prevent Inter and Intra VAP client communication: When enabled, clients
cannot establish wireless communications with any other client, either those
associated to the same VAP interface or any other VAP interface.
AP Management Filter – Controls management access to the access point from
wireless clients. Management interfaces include the web, Telnet, or SNMP.
(Default: Disabled)
„
„
Disabled: Allows management access from wireless clients.
Enabled: Blocks management access from wireless clients.
Uplink Port MAC Address Filtering Status – Prevents traffic with specified source
MAC addresses from being forwarded to wireless clients through the access
point. You can add a maximum of eight MAC addresses to the filter table.
(Default: Disabled)
„
„
MAC Address: Specifies a MAC address to filter, in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.
Permission: Adds or deletes a MAC address from the filtering table.
Ethernet Type Filter – Controls checks on the Ethernet type of all incoming and
outgoing Ethernet packets against the protocol filtering table. (Default: Disabled)
„
„
Disabled: Access point does not filter Ethernet protocol types.
Enabled: Access point filters Ethernet protocol types based on the configuration
of protocol types in the filter table. If the status of a protocol is set to “ON,”
the protocol is filtered from the access point.
NOTE: Ethernet protocol types not listed in the filtering table are always forwarded
by the access point.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filter Control
VLAN
The access point can employ VLAN tagging support to control access to network
resources and increase security. VLANs separate traffic passing between the
access point, associated clients, and the wired network. There can be a VLAN
assigned to each associated client, a default VLAN for each VAP (Virtual Access
Point) interface, and a management VLAN for the access point.
Note the following points about the access point’s VLAN support:
„
The management VLAN is for managing the access point through remote
management tools, such as the web interface, SSH, SNMP, or Telnet. The
access point only accepts management traffic that is tagged with the specified
management VLAN ID.
„
All wireless clients associated to the access point are assigned to a VLAN. If IEEE
802.1X is being used to authenticate wireless clients, specific VLAN IDs can be
configured on the RADIUS server to be assigned to each client. If a client is not
assigned to a specific VLAN or if 802.1X is not used, the client is assigned to
the default VLAN for the VAP interface with which it is associated. The access
point only allows traffic tagged with assigned VLAN IDs or default VLAN IDs to
access clients associated on each VAP interface.
„
When VLAN support is enabled on the access point, traffic passed to the wired
network is tagged with the appropriate VLAN ID, either an assigned client
VLAN ID, default VLAN ID, or the management VLAN ID. Traffic received from
the wired network must also be tagged with one of these known VLAN IDs.
Received traffic that has an unknown VLAN ID or no VLAN tag is dropped.
„
When VLAN support is disabled, the access point does not tag traffic passed to
the wired network and ignores the VLAN tags on any received frames.
NOTE: Before enabling VLAN tagging on the access point, be sure to configure the
attached network switch port to support tagged VLAN frames from the access
point’s management VLAN ID, default VLAN IDs, and other client VLAN IDs.
Otherwise, connectivity to the access point will be lost when you enable the VLAN
feature.
Using IEEE 802.1X and a central RADIUS server, up to 64 VLAN IDs can be
mapped to specific wireless clients, allowing users to remain within the same
VLAN as they move around a campus site. This feature can also be used to control
access to network resources from clients, thereby improving security.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A VLAN ID (1-4094) can be assigned to a client after successful IEEE 802.1X
authentication. The client VLAN IDs must be configured on the RADIUS server for
each user authorized to access the network. If a client does not have a configured
VLAN ID on the RADIUS server, the access point assigns the client to the
configured default VLAN ID for the VAP interface.
NOTE: When using IEEE 802.1X to dynamically assign VLAN IDs, the access point
must have 802.1X authentication enabled and a RADIUS server configured.
Wireless clients must also support 802.1X client software.
When setting up VLAN IDs for each user on the RADIUS server, be sure to use the
RADIUS attributes and values as indicated in the following table.
Number
RADIUS Attribute
Tunnel-Type
Value
64
65
81
VLAN (13)
802
Tunnel-Medium-Type
Tunnel-Private-Group-ID
VLANID
(1 to 4094 as hexadecimal or string)
VLAN IDs on the RADIUS server can be entered as hexadecimal digits or a string
(see “radius-server vlan-format” on page 63).
NOTE: The specific configuration of RADIUS server software is beyond the scope
of this guide. Refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS server
software.
Figure 18 Filter Control - VLAN ID
VLAN – Enables or disables VLAN tagging support on the access point.
Management VLAN ID – The VLAN ID that traffic must have to be able to manage
the access point. (Range 1-4094; Default: 1)
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a communication protocol
designed specifically for managing devices on a network. Equipment commonly
managed with SNMP includes switches, routers and host computers. SNMP is
typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network
environment, as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect
potential problems.
Managed devices supporting SNMP contain software, which runs locally on the
device and is referred to as an agent. A defined set of variables, known as
managed objects, is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the
device. These objects are defined in a Management Information Base (MIB) that
provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the agent.
SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to
access this information over the network.
The access point includes an onboard agent that supports SNMP versions 1, 2c,
and 3 clients. This agent continuously monitors the status of the access point, as
well as the traffic passing to and from wireless clients. A network management
station can access this information using SNMP management software that is
compliant with MIB II. To implement SNMP management, the access point must
first have an IP address and subnet mask, configured either manually or
dynamically. Access to the onboard agent using SNMP v1 and v2c is controlled by
community strings. To communicate with the access point, the management
station must first submit a valid community string for authentication.
Access to the access point using SNMP v3 provides additional security features
that cover message integrity, authentication, and encryption; as well as
controlling notifications that are sent to specified user targets.
CONFIGURING SNMP AND TRAP MESSAGE PARAMETERS
The access point SNMP agent must be enabled to function (for versions 1, 2c, and
3 clients). Management access using SNMP v1 and v2c also requires community
strings to be configured for authentication. Trap notifications can be enabled and
sent to up to four management stations.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Figure 19 SNMP
SNMP – Enables or disables SNMP management access and also enables the
access point to send SNMP traps (notifications). (Default: Disable)
Location – A text string that describes the system location. (Maximum length: 255
characters)
Contact – A text string that describes the system contact. (Maximum length: 255
characters)
Community Name (Read Only) – Defines the SNMP community access string that
has read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve
MIB objects. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive; Default: public)
Community Name (Read/Write) – Defines the SNMP community access string that
has read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve
and modify MIB objects. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive;
Default: private)
Trap Destination (1 to 4) – Enables recipients (up to four) of SNMP notifications.
„
Trap Destination IP Address – Specifies the recipient of SNMP notifications.
Enter the IP address or the host name. (Host Name: 1 to 63 characters, case
sensitive)
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP
„
Trap Destination Community Name – The community string sent with the
notification operation. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive;
Default: public)
Engine ID – Sets the engine identifier for the SNMPv3 agent that resides on the
access point. This engine protects against message replay, delay, and redirection.
The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the
security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets. A default
engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the access point. (Range:
10 to 64 hexadecimal characters)
NOTE: If the local engine ID is deleted or changed, all SNMP users will be cleared.
All existing users will need to be re-configured. If you want to change the default
engine ID, change it first before configuring other SNMP v3 parameters.
Figure 20 Trap Configuration
Trap Configuration – Allows selection of specific SNMP notifications to send. The
following items are available:
„
„
„
sysSystemUp - The access point is up and running.
sysSystemDown - The access point is about to shutdown and reboot.
sysRadiusServerChanged - The access point has changed from the primary
RADIUS server to the secondary, or from the secondary to the primary.
„
„
„
„
dot11StationAssociation - A client station has successfully associated with the
access point.
dot11StationReAssociation - A client station has successfully re-associated with
the access point.
dot11StationAuthentication - A client station has been successfully
authenticated.
dot11StationRequestFail - A client station has failed association, re-association,
or authentication.
„
„
dot11InterfaceGFail - The 802.11b interface has failed.
dot11InterfaceAFail - The 802.11a or 802.11g interface has failed.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
„
„
dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess - A client station has successfully authenticated its
MAC address with the RADIUS server.
dot1xMacAddrAuthFail - A client station has failed MAC address
authentication with the RADIUS server.
„
„
dot1xAuthNotInitiated - A client station did not initiate 802.1X authentication.
dot1xAuthSuccess - A 802.1X client station has been successfully
authenticated by the RADIUS server.
„
„
dot1xAuthFail - A 802.1X client station has failed RADIUS authentication.
localMacAddrAuthSuccess - A client station has successfully authenticated its
MAC address with the local database on the access point.
„
„
localMacAddrAuthFail - A client station has failed authentication with the local
MAC address database on the access point.
sntpServerFail - The access point has failed to set the time from the configured
SNTP server.
CONFIGURING SNMPV3 USERS
The access point allows up to 10 SNMP v3 users to be configured. Each user must
be defined by a unique name, assigned to one of three pre-defined security
groups, and configured with specific authentication and encryption settings.
Figure 21 Configuring SNMPv3 Users
User – The SNMPv3 user name. (32 characters maximum)
Group – The SNMPv3 group name. (Options: RO, RWAuth, or RWPriv; Default:
RO)
„
„
„
RO – Read-only access.
RWAuth – Read/write access with user authentication.
RWPriv – Read/write access with both user authentication and data encryption.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administration
Auth Type – The authentication type used for the SNMP user; either MD5 or
none. When MD5 is selected, enter a password in the corresponding Passphrase
field.
Priv Type – The data encryption type used for the SNMP user; either DES or none.
When DES is selected, enter a key in the corresponding Passphrase field.
Passphrase – The password or key associated with the authentication and privacy
settings. A minimum of eight plain text characters is required.
Action – Click the Add button to add a new user to the list. Click the edit button
to change details of an existing user. Click the Del button to remove a user from
the list.
NOTE: Users must be assigned to groups that have the same security levels. For
example, a user who has “Auth Type” and “Priv Type” configured to MD5 and DES
respectively (that it, uses both authentication and data encryption) must be
assigned to the RWPriv group. If this same user were instead assigned to the
read-only (RO) group, the user would not be able to access the database.
ADMINISTRATION
CHANGING THE PASSWORD
Management access to the web and CLI interface on the access point is
controlled through a single user name and password. You can also gain additional
access security by using control filters (see “Filter Control” on page 15).
To protect access to the management interface, you need to configure an
Administrator’s user name and password as soon as possible. If the user name
and password are not configured, then anyone having access to the access point
may be able to compromise access point and network security. Once a new
Administrator has been configured, you can delete the default “admin” user
name from the system.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Figure 22 Administration
Username – The name of the user. The default name is “admin.” (Length: 3-16
characters, case sensitive)
New Password – The password for management access. (Length: 3-16 characters,
case sensitive)
Confirm New Password – Enter the password again for verification.
TELNET AND SSH SETTINGS
Telnet is a remote management tool that can be used to configure the access
point from anywhere in the network. However, Telnet is not secure from hostile
attacks. The Secure Shell (SSH) can act as a secure replacement for Telnet. The
SSH protocol uses generated public keys to encrypt all data transfers passing
between the access point and SSH-enabled management station clients and
ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered. Clients can then
securely use the local user name and password for access authentication.
Note that SSH client software needs to be installed on the management station to
access the access point for management via the SSH protocol.
NOTE: The access point supports only SSH version 2.0.
NOTE: After boot up, the SSH server needs about two minutes to generate host
encryption keys. The SSH server is disabled while the keys are being generated.
Figure 23 Telnet and SSH Settings
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administration
„
„
„
Telnet Server Status: Enables or disables the Telnet server. (Default: Enabled)
SSH Server Status: Enables or disables the SSH server. (Default: Enabled)
SSH Server Port: Sets the UDP port for the SSH server. (Range: 1-65535;
Default: 22)
UPGRADING FIRMWARE
You can upgrade new access point software from a local file on the management
workstation, or from an TFTP server. New software may be provided periodically
from your distributor.
After upgrading new software, you must reboot the access point to implement
the new code. Until a reboot occurs, the access point will continue to run the
software it was using before the upgrade started. Also note that new software
that is incompatible with the current configuration automatically restores the
access point to the factory default settings when first activated after a reboot.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Figure 24 Firmware Upgrade
Before upgrading new software, verify that the access point is connected to the
network and has been configured with a compatible IP address and subnet mask.
If you need to download from an FTP or TFTP server, take the following additional
steps:
„
Obtain the IP address of the FTP or TFTP server where the access point software
is stored.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administration
„
„
If upgrading from an FTP server, be sure that you have an account configured
on the server with a user name and password.
If VLANs are configured on the access point, determine the VLAN ID with which
the FTP or TFTP server is associated, and then configure the management
station, or the network port to which it is attached, with the same VLAN ID. If
you are managing the access point from a wireless client, the VLAN ID for the
wireless client must be configured on a RADIUS server.
Current version – Version number of runtime code.
Firmware Upgrade Local – Downloads an operation code image file from the web
management station to the access point using HTTP. Use the Browse button to
locate the image file locally on the management station and click Start Upgrade
to proceed.
„
New firmware file: Specifies the name of the code file on the server. The new
firmware file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the
file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names is
32 characters for files on the access point. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”,
“-”, “_”)
Firmware Upgrade Remote – Downloads an operation code image file from a
specified remote FTP or TFTP server. After filling in the following fields, click Start
Upgrade to proceed.
„
New firmware file: Specifies the name of the code file on the server. The new
firmware file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the
file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on
the FTP/TFTP server is 255 characters or 32 characters for files on the access
point. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
„
„
„
IP Address: IP address or host name of FTP or TFTP server.
Username: The user ID used for login on an FTP server.
Password: The password used for login on an FTP server.
Configuration File Backup/Restore – Uploads the current access point
configuration file to a specified remote TFTP server. A configuration file can also
be downloaded to the access point to restore a specific configuration.
„
Config file: Specifies the name of the configuration file, which must always be
“syscfg.” A path on the server can be specified using “/” in the name, providing
the path already exists; for example, “myfolder/syscfg.” Other than to indicate
a path, the file name must not contain any slashes (\ or /), the leading letter
cannot be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP
server is 255 characters. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
„
IP Address: IP address or host name of the TFTP server.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Restore Factory Settings – Click the Restore button in the user interface to reset
the configuration settings for the access point to the factory defaults and reboot
the system. Note that all user configured information will be lost. You will have to
re-enter the default user name (admin) to re-gain management access to this
device.
Reboot Access Point – Click the Reset button in the user interface to reboot the
system.
NOTE: If you have upgraded system software, then you must reboot the access
point to implement the new operation code. New software that is incompatible
with the current configuration automatically restores the access point to default
values when first activated after a reboot.
WDS AND SPANNING TREE SETTINGS
Each access point radio interface can be configured to operate in a bridge or
repeater mode, which allows it to forward traffic directly to other access point
units. To set up bridge links between access point units, you must configure the
wireless Distribution System (WDS) forwarding table by specifying the wireless
MAC address of all units to which you want to forward traffic. Up to six WDS
bridge or repeater links can be specified for each unit in the wireless bridge
network.
The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) can be used to detect and disable network
loops, and to provide backup links between bridges. This allows a wireless bridge
to interact with other bridging devices (that is, an STP-compliant switch, bridge or
router) in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two
stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over
when a primary link goes down.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WDS and Spanning Tree Settings
Figure 25 WDS and Spanning Tree Settings
WDS Bridge – Up to six WDS bridge or repeater links (MAC addresses) per radio
interface can be specified for each unit in the wireless bridge network. One unit
only must be configured as the “root bridge” in the wireless network. The root
bridge is the unit connected to the main core of the wired LAN. Other bridges
need to specify one “Parent” link to the root bridge or to a bridge connected to
the root bridge. The other five WDS links are available as “Child” links to other
bridges.
„
Bridge Role – Each radio interface can be set to operate in one of the following
four modes: (Default: AP)
• AP (Access Point): Operates as an access point for wireless clients, providing
connectivity to a wired LAN.
• Bridge: Operates as a bridge to other access points. The “Parent” link to the
root bridge must be configured. Up to five other ”Child” links are available
to other bridges.
• Repeater: Operates as a wireless repeater, extending the range for remote
wireless clients and connecting them to the root bridge. The “Parent” link
to the root bridge must be configured. In this mode, traffic is not forwarded
to the Ethernet port from the radio interface.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
• Root Bridge: Operates as the root bridge in the wireless bridge network. Up
to six ”Child” links are available to other bridges in the network.
Master/Slave Mode – Selects between Master and Slave mode. A single master
enables up to five slave links, whereas a slave will have only one link to the
master.
Channel Auto Sync – This command allows a child bridge to automatically find
the operating channel of its parent bridge.
CAUTION: Do not enable Channel Auto Sync on a master bridge if there is no
root bridge acting as the master bridge's parent.
!
Bridge Parent – The physical layer address of the root bridge unit or the bridge
unit connected to the root bridge. (12 hexadecimal digits in the form
“xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx”)
Bridge Child – The physical layer address of other bridge units for which this unit
serves as the bridge parent or the root bridge. (12 hexadecimal digits in the form
“xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx”)
Figure 26 Spanning Tree Protocol
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WDS and Spanning Tree Settings
Figure 27 Spanning Tree Protocol
Spanning Tree Protocol – STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging
device (STP-compliant switch, bridge or router) that serves as the root of the
spanning tree network. It selects a root port on each bridging device (except for
the root device) which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet
from that device to the root device. Then it selects a designated bridging device
from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from
that LAN to the root device. All ports connected to designated bridging devices
are assigned as designated ports. After determining the lowest cost spanning
tree, it enables all root ports and designated ports, and disables all other ports.
Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and
designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops.
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello
BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the root bridge. If a bridge
does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval (Maximum Age), the bridge
assumes that the link to the root bridge is down. This bridge will then initiate
negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid
network topology.
„
Bridge – Enables/disables STP on the wireless bridge or repeater.
(Default: Disabled)
„
Bridge Priority – Used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated
port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STP root device.
However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC
address will then become the root device. (Note that lower numeric values
indicate higher priority.)
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
• Range: 0-65535
• Default: 32768
„
Bridge Max Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without
receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device
ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at
regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last
configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If
it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports
attached to the network. (Range: 6-40 seconds)
• Default: 20
• Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].
• Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay - 1)]
„
Bridge Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a
configuration message. (Range: 1-10 seconds)
• Default: 2
• Minimum: 1
• Maximum: The lower of 10 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) -1]
„
Bridge Forwarding Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device waits
before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is
required because every device must receive information about topology
changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to
listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding
state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result. (Range: 4-30 seconds)
• Default: 15
• Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]
• Maximum: 30
„
Link Path Cost – This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path
between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached
to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path
cost takes precedence over port priority.)
• Range: 1-65535
• Default: Ethernet interface: 19; Wireless interface: 40
„
Link Port Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree
Protocol. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with
the highest priority (i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the
spanning tree. This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Log
the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one
port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will
be enabled.
• Default: 128
• Range: 0-240, in steps of 16
SYSTEM LOG
The access point can be configured to send event and error messages to a System
Log Server. The system clock can also be synchronized with a time server, so that
all the messages sent to the Syslog server are stamped with the correct time and
date.
Figure 28 System Log
ENABLING SYSTEM LOGGING
The access point supports a logging process that can control error messages
saved to memory or sent to a Syslog server. The logged messages serve as a
valuable tool for isolating access point and network problems.
System Log Setup – Enables the logging of error messages. (Default: Disable)
Logging Level – Sets the minimum severity level for event logging.
(Default:Informational)
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Logging Host – Enables the sending of log messages to a Syslog server host. Up
to four Syslog servers are supported on the access point. (Default: Disable)
Server Name / IP – Specifies a Syslog server name or IP address. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
SNTP Server – Enables the sending of log messages to a Syslog server host.
(Default: Disable)
Primary Server – The IP address the primary Syslog server. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
Secondary Server – The IP address the secondary Syslog server. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
Enter Time Zone – Sets the desired time zone + or - GMT.
Enable Daylight Saving – Adjusts the clock for summertime and wintertime.
The system allows you to limit the messages that are logged by specifying a
minimum severity level. The following table lists the error message levels from the
most severe (Emergency) to least severe (Debug). The message levels that are
logged include the specified minimum level up to the Emergency level.
Table 2 Logging Levels
Error Level
Emergency
Alerts
Description
System unusable
Immediate action needed
Critical
Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error - resource
exhausted)
Error
Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)
Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)
Normal but significant condition, such as cold start
Informational messages only
Warning
Notice
Informational
Debug
Debugging messages
NOTE: The access point error log can be viewed using the Event Logs window in
the Status section (page 5-62). The Event Logs window displays the last 128
messages logged in chronological order, from the newest to the oldest. Log
messages saved in the access point’s memory are erased when the device is
rebooted.
CONFIGURING SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) allows the access point to set its internal
clock based on periodic updates from a time server (SNTP or NTP). Maintaining an
accurate time on the access point enables the system log to record meaningful
dates and times for event entries. If the clock is not set, the access point will only
record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RSSI
The access point acts as an SNTP client, periodically sending time synchronization
requests to specific time servers. You can configure up to two time server IP
addresses. The access point will attempt to poll each server in the configured
sequence.
SNTP Server – Configures the access point to operate as an SNTP client. When
enabled, at least one time server IP address must be specified.
„
Primary Server: The IP address of an SNTP or NTP time server that the access
point attempts to poll for a time update.
„
Secondary Server: The IP address of a secondary SNTP or NTP time server. The
access point first attempts to update the time from the primary server; if this
fails it attempts an update from the secondary server.
NOTE: The access point also allows you to disable SNTP and set the system clock
manually.
Set Time Zone – SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (or UTC, formerly
Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT) based on the time at the Earth’s prime meridian,
zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to your local time, you
must indicate the number of hours your time zone is located before (east) or after
(west) UTC.
Enable Daylight Saving – The access point provides a way to automatically adjust
the system clock for Daylight Savings Time changes. To use this feature you must
define the month and date to begin and to end the change from standard time.
During this period the system clock is set back by one hour.
RSSI
The RSSI value displayed on the RSSI page represents a signal to noise ratio. A
value of 30 would indicate that the power of the received signal is 30 dBm above
the signal noise threshold. This value can be used to align antennas and monitor
the quality of the received signal for bridge links. An RSSI value of about 30 or
more indicates a strong enough signal to support the maximum data rate of
54 Mbps. Below a value of 30, the supported data rate would drop to lower
rates. A value of 15 or less indicates that the signal is weak and the antennas may
require realignment.
The RSSI controls allow the receive signal for each WDS port to be displayed.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Figure 29 RSSI
RSSI:
„
„
„
Auto Refresh – Enables or disables the refreshing of RSSI information.
RSSI Value – The displayed RSSI value for a selected port.
Port Number – Selects a specific WDS port for which to display the RSSI output
value. Ports 1-6 are available for a Master unit, only port 1 for a Slave unit.
(Default: 1)
Distance:
„
„
Mode: Indicates if the radio interface is operating in normal or Turbo mode.
Distance: The approximate distance between antennas in a bridge link.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Interface
LED Status:
„
Mode – Selects AP mode or Bridge mode.
Bridge Port – Allows the user to select the bridge port for the LED display.
(Default:1; Range: 1~6)
There are currently no equivalent CLI commands for the RSSI controls.
„
RADIO INTERFACE
The IEEE 802.11a and 802.11g interfaces include configuration options for radio
signal characteristics and wireless security features. The configuration options are
nearly identical, and are therefore both covered in this section of the manual.
The access point can operate in three modes, IEEE 802.11a only, 802.11b/g only,
or a mixed 802.11a/b/g mode. Also note that 802.11g is backward compatible
with 802.11b. These interfaces are configured independently under the following
web pages:
„
„
802.11a Interface
802.11b/g Interface
Each radio supports up to four virtual access point (VAP) interfaces numbered 1to
4. Each VAP functions as a separate access point, and can be configured with its
own Service Set Identification (SSID) and security settings. However, most radio
signal parameters apply to all four VAP interfaces.
The VAPs function similar to a VLAN, with each VAP mapped to its own VLAN ID.
Traffic to specific VAPs can be segregated based on user groups or application
traffic.
NOTE: The 8760 Access Point ships from the factory enabled only for channels
allowed in the US/Canada. If you live in an area where additional channels are
allowed, go to the 3Com web site (http://www.3com.com) and download the
latest software that will allow additional channels in your country.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
802.11A INTERFACE
normal mode or up to 108 Mbps in Turbo mode.
First configure the radio settings that apply to the individual VAPs (Virtual Access
Point) and the common radio settings that apply to the overall system. After you
have configured the radio settings, go to the Security page under the 802.11a
Interface (See “Security” on page 50.), enable the radio service for any of the VAP
interfaces, and then set an SSID to identify the wireless network service provided
by each VAP. Remember that only clients with the same SSID can associate with a
VAP.
NOTE: You must first select a country before the wireless interfaces are enabled.
Configuring Radio Settings
To configure VAP radio settings, select the Radio Settings page.
Figure 30 Radio Settings A
Radio Status – Displays if the radio is enabled or disabled for this VAP.
NOTE: You must first enable VAP interface 1 before you can enable other VAP
interfaces.
SSID – The name of the basic service set provided by a VAP interface. Clients that
want to connect to the network through the access point must set their SSID to
the same as that of an access point VAP interface. (Default: 3Com1 to 3Com4 for
802.11a, 3Com5 to 3Com8 for 802.11b/g; Range: 1-32 characters)
Default VLAN ID – The VLAN ID assigned to wireless clients associated to the VAP
interface that are not assigned to a specific VLAN by RADIUS server configuration.
(Default: 1)
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Interface
Closed System – When enabled, the VAP interface does not include its SSID in
beacon messages. Nor does it respond to probe requests from clients that do not
include a fixed SSID. (Default: Disable)
Maximum Associations – This command configures the maximum number of
clients that can be associated with the access point at the same time.
Authentication Timeout Interval – The time within which the client should finish
authentication before authentication times out. (Range: 5-60 minutes; Default:
60 minutes)
Association Timeout Interval – The idle time interval (when no frames are sent)
after which a client is disassociated from the VAP interface. (Range: 5-60 minutes;
Default: 30 minutes)
CONFIGURING COMMON RADIO SETTINGS
To configure common radio settings, select the Radio Settings page, and scroll
down to below the VAP radio settings.
Figure 31 Radio Settings A and B/G
Country Code – The current country code setting. This setting restricts operation
of the access point to radio channels and transmit power levels permitted for
wireless networks in the specified country.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Description – Adds a comment or description to the wireless interface. (Range:
1-80 characters)
Turbo Mode – The normal 802.11a wireless operation mode provides connections
up to 54 Mbps. Turbo Mode is an enhanced mode (not regulated in IEEE 802.11a)
that provides a higher data rate of up to 108 Mbps. Enabling Turbo Mode allows
the access point to provide connections up to 108 Mbps. (Default: Disabled)
NOTE: In normal mode, the access point provides a channel bandwidth of 20
MHz, and supports the maximum number of channels permitted by local
regulations (e.g., 13 channels for the United States). In Turbo Mode, the channel
bandwidth is increased to 40 MHz to support the increased data rate. However,
this reduces the number of channels supported (e.g., 5 channels for the United
States).
NOTE: .Check your country’s regulations to see if Turbo Mode is allowed.
Super Mode – The Atheros proprietary Super A performance enhancements are
supported by the access point. These enhancements include bursting,
compression, and fast frames. Maximum throughput ranges between 40 to 60
Mbps for connections to Atheros-compatible clients. (Default: Disabled)
Auto Channel Select – Enables the access point to automatically select an
unoccupied radio channel. (Default: Enabled)
NOTE: Check your country’s regulations to see if Auto Channel can be disabled.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Interface
Radio Channel – The radio channel that the access point uses to Normal Mode
communicate with wireless clients. When multiple access points
are deployed in the same area, set the channel on neighboring
access points at least four channels apart to avoid interference
with each other. For example, in the United States you can
deploy up to four access points in the same area (e.g., channels
36, 56, 149, 165). Also note that the channel for wireless
clients is automatically set to the same as that used by the
access point to which it is linked. (Default: Channel 60 for
normal mode, and channel 42 for Turbo mode)
Antenna ID – Selects the antenna to be used by the access
point; either the included diversity antennas or an optional
external antenna. The optional external antennas that are
certified for use with the access point are listed in the
drop-down menu. Selecting the correct antenna ID ensures that
the access point's radio transmissions are within regulatory
power limits for the country of operation. (Default: 3Com
Integrated Antenna)
Turbo Mode
NOTE: The Antenna ID must be selected in conjunction with the Output Antenna
to configure proper use of any of the antenna options.
Output Antenna – Selects the use of both fixed antennas operating in diversity
mode or a single antenna. (Default: Diversity)
„
Both: The radio uses both antennas in a diversity system. Select this method
when the Antenna ID is set to "3Com Integrated Antenna" to use the access
point's integrated antennas.
„
„
Right: To activate the 5 GHz external antenna, one must select the "right "
antenna in the antenna selection UI.
Left: To activate the 2.4 GHz external antenna, one must select the "left "
antenna in the antenna selection UI.
Transmit Power – Adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted from the
access point. The higher the transmission power, the farther the transmission
range. Power selection is not just a trade off between coverage area and
maximum supported clients. You also have to ensure that high-power signals do
not interfere with the operation of other radio devices in the service area.
(Options: 100%, 50%, 25%, 12%, minimum; Default: 100%)
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
NOTE: When operating the access point using 5 GHz channels in a European
Community country, the end user and installer are obligated to operate the device
in accordance with European regulatory requirements for Transmit Power Control
(TPC).
Maximum Transmit Data Rate – The maximum data rate at which the access point
transmits unicast packets on the wireless interface. The maximum transmission
distance is affected by the data rate. The lower the data rate, the longer the
transmission distance. (Options: 54, 48, 36, 24 Mbps; Default: 54 Mbps)
Maximum Multicast Data Rate – The maximum data rate at which the access
point transmits multicast and broadcast packets on the wireless interface.
(Options: 24, 12, 6 Mbps; Default: 6 Mbps)
Beacon Interval – The rate at which beacon signals are transmitted from the
access point. The beacon signals allow wireless clients to maintain contact with
the access point. They may also carry power-management information.
(Range: 20-1000 TUs; Default: 100 TUs)
Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) – The rate at which stations in sleep
mode must wake up to receive broadcast/multicast transmissions.
The DTIM interval indicates how often the MAC layer forwards
broadcast/multicast traffic, which is necessary to wake up stations that are using
Power Save mode. The default value of 1 indicates that the access point will save
all broadcast/multicast frames for the Basic Service Set (BSS) and forward them
after every beacon. Using smaller DTIM intervals delivers broadcast/multicast
frames in a more timely manner, causing stations in Power Save mode to wake up
more often and drain power faster. Using higher DTIM values reduces the power
used by stations in Power Save mode, but delays the transmission of
broadcast/multicast frames.
(Range: 1-255 beacons; Default: 1 beacon)
Fragment Length (256~2346)– Configures the minimum packet size that can be
fragmented when passing through the access point. Fragmentation of the PDUs
(Package Data Unit) can increase the reliability of transmissions because it
increases the probability of a successful transmission due to smaller frame size. If
there is significant interference present, or collisions due to high network
utilization, try setting the fragment size to send smaller fragments. This will speed
up the retransmission of smaller frames. However, it is more efficient to set the
fragment size larger if very little or no interference is present because it requires
overhead to send multiple frames. (Range: 256-2346 bytes; Default: 2346 bytes)
RTS Threshold – Sets the packet size threshold at which a Request to Send (RTS)
signal must be sent to a receiving station prior to the sending station starting
communications. The access point sends RTS frames to a receiving station to
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Interface
negotiate the sending of a data frame. After receiving an RTS frame, the station
sends a CTS (clear to send) frame to notify the sending station that it can start
sending data.
If the RTS threshold is set to 0, the access point always sends RTS signals. If set to
2347, the access point never sends RTS signals. If set to any other value, and the
packet size equals or exceeds the RTS threshold, the RTS/CTS (Request to Send /
Clear to Send) mechanism will be enabled.
The access points contending for the medium may not be aware of each other.
The RTS/CTS mechanism can solve this “Hidden Node Problem.” (Range: 0-2347
bytes: Default: 2347 bytes)
802.11B/G INTERFACE
The IEEE 802.11g standard operates within the 2.4 GHz band at up to 54 Mbps.
Also note that because the IEEE 802.11g standard is an extension of the IEEE
802.11b standard, it allows clients with 802.11b wireless network cards to
associate to an 802.11g access point.
First configure the radio settings that apply to the individual VAPs (Virtual Access
Point) and the common radio settings that apply to all of the 802.11g interfaces.
After you have configured the radio settings, enable the radio service for any of
the VAP interfaces, and then set an SSID to identify the wireless network service
provided by each VAP. Remember that only clients with the same SSID can
associate with a VAP.
NOTE: You must first select a country of operation before interfaces can be
enabled.
interface. For information on the these commands, refer to the following
sections:
„
„
„
„
“Configuring Radio Settings” on page 38
“Configuring Rogue AP Detection” on page 73
“Configuring Common Radio Settings” on page 39
“Configuring Wi-Fi Multimedia” on page 80
Only the radio settings specific to the 802.11g interface are included in this
section. To configure the 802.11g radio settings, select the Radio Settings page.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Figure 32 Radio Settings B/G
Client Access Mode – Selects the operating mode for the 802.11g wireless
interface. (Default: 802.11b+g)
„
802.11b+g: Both 802.11b and 802.11g clients can communicate with the
access point (up to 54 Mbps).
„
802.11b only: Both 802.11b and 802.11g clients can communicate with the
access point, but 802.11g clients can only transfer data at 802.11b standard
rates (up to 11 Mbps).
„
802.11g only: Only 802.11g clients can communicate with the access point (up
to 54 Mbps).
Turbo Mode – The normal 802.11g wireless operation mode provides connections
up to 54 Mbps. Turbo Mode is an enhanced proprietary mode (Atheros 802.11g
Turbo) that provides a higher data rate of up to 108 Mbps. Enabling Turbo mode
allows the access point to provide connections up to 108 Mbps to
Atheros-compatible clients.
NOTE: In normal mode, the access point supports the maximum number of
channels permitted by local regulations (e.g., 11 channels for the United States). In
Turbo mode, channel bonding is used to provide the increased data rate. However,
this reduces the number of channels available to one (Channel 6).
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Interface
Super Mode – The Atheros proprietary Super G performance enhancements
are supported by the access point. These enhancements include bursting,
compression, fast frames and dynamic turbo. Maximum throughput ranges
between 40 to 60 Mbps for connections to Atheros-compatible clients.
(Default: Disabled)
Radio Channel – The radio channel that the access point uses to communicate
with wireless clients. When multiple access points are deployed in the same area,
set the channel on neighboring access points at least five channels apart to avoid
interference with each other. For example, in the United States you can deploy up
to three access points in the same area (e.g., channels 1, 6, 11). Also note that
the channel for wireless clients is automatically set to the same as that used by
the access point to which it is linked. (Range: 1-11; Default: 1)
Auto Channel Select – Enables the access point to automatically select an
unoccupied radio channel. (Default: Enabled)
Maximum Transmit Data Rate – The maximum data rate at which the
access point transmits unicast packets on the wireless interface. The
maximum transmission distance is affected by the data rate. The lower the
data rate, the longer the transmission distance. (Default: 54 Mbps)
Preamble Length – Sets the length of the signal preamble that is used at
the start of a data transmission. (Default: Long)
„
Short: Sets the preamble to short (96 microseconds). Using a short
preamble can increase data throughput.
„
Long: Sets the preamble to long (192 microseconds). Using a long
preamble ensures the access point can support all 802.11b and 802.11g
clients.
„
Auto: Sets the preamble according to the capability of clients that are currently
associated. Uses a short preamble (96 microseconds) if all associated clients can
support it, otherwise a long preamble is used. The access point can increase
data throughput when using a short preamble, but will only use a short
preamble if it determines that all associated clients support it.
CONFIGURING WI-FI MULTIMEDIA
Wireless networks offer an equal opportunity for all devices to transmit data from
any type of application. Although this is acceptable for most applications,
multimedia applications (with audio and video) are particularly sensitive to the
delay and throughput variations that result from this equal opportunity wireless
access method. For multimedia applications to run well over a wireless network, a
Quality of Service (QoS) mechanism is required to prioritize traffic types and
provide an enhanced opportunity wireless access method.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The access point implements QoS using the Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) standard.
Using WMM, the access point is able to prioritize traffic and optimize
performance when multiple applications compete for wireless network
bandwidth at the same time. WMM employs techniques that are a subset of the
developing IEEE 802.11e QoS standard and it enables the access point to inter
operate with both WMMenabled clients and other devices that may lack any
WMM functionality.
Access Categories – WMM defines four access categories (ACs): voice, video, best
effort, and background. These categories correspond to traffic priority levels and
are mapped to IEEE 802.1D priority tags. The direct mapping of the four ACs to
802.1D priorities is specifically intended to facilitate inter operability with other
wired network QoS policies. While the four ACs are specified for specific types of
traffic, WMM allows the priority levels to be configured to match any
network-wide QoS policy. WMM also specifies a protocol that access points can
use to communicate the configured traffic priority levels to QoS-enabled wireless
clients.
Table 3 WMM Access Categories
WMM Access Categories
Access
Category
WMM
Designation
802.1D
Tags
Description
Highest priority, minimum delay.
Time-sensitive data such as VoIP (Voice 7, 6
over IP) calls.
AC_VO (AC3) Voice
High priority, minimum delay.
Time-sensitive data such as streaming
video.
AC_VI (AC2)
AC_BE (AC0)
AC_BK (AC1)
Video
5, 4
Normal priority, medium delay and
throughput. Data only affected by long
delays. Data from applications or
devices that lack QoS capabilities.
Best Effort
Background
0, 3
Lowest priority. Data with no delay or
throughput requirements, such as bulk 2, 1
data transfers.
WMM Operation – WMM uses traffic priority based on the four ACs; Voice,
Video, Best Effort, and Background. The higher the AC priority, the higher the
probability that data is transmitted.
When the access point forwards traffic, WMM adds data packets to four
independent transmit queues, one for each AC, depending on the 802.1D
priority tag of the packet. Data packets without a priority tag are always added to
the Best Effort AC queue. From the four queues, an internal “virtual” collision
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Interface
resolution mechanism first selects data with the highest priority to be granted a
transmit opportunity. Then the same collision resolution mechanism is used
externally to determine which device has access to the wireless medium.
For each AC queue, the collision resolution mechanism is dependent on two
timing parameters:
„
AIFSN (Arbitration Inter-Frame Space Number), a number used to calculate the
minimum time between data frames
„
CW (Contention Window), a number used to calculate a random backoff time
After a collision detection, a backoff wait time is calculated. The total wait time is
the sum of a minimum wait time (Arbitration Inter-Frame Space, or AIFS)
determined from the AIFSN, and a random backoff time calculated from a value
selected from zero to the CW. The CW value varies within a configurable range. It
starts at CWMin and doubles after every collision up to a maximum value,
CWMax. After a successful transmission, the CW value is reset to its CWMin
value.
Figure 33 WMM Backoff Times
Time
CWMin
CWMax
High Priority
AIFS
Random Backoff
Minimum Wait Time
Random Wait Time
CWMin
CWMax
Low Priority
Random Backoff
AIFS
Minimum Wait Time
Random Wait Time
For high-priority traffic, the AIFSN and CW values are smaller. The smaller values
equate to less backoff and wait time, and therefore more transmit opportunities.
To configure WMM, select the Radio Settings page, and scroll down to the WMM
configuration settings.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Figure 34 WMM Configuration
WMM – Sets the WMM operational mode on the access point. When enabled,
the parameters for each AC queue will be employed on the access point and QoS
capabilities are advertised to WMM-enabled clients. (Default: Support)
„
Disable: WMM is disabled.
„
Support: WMM will be used for any associated device that supports this
feature.
Devices that do not support this feature may still associate with the access
point.
„
Required: WMM must be supported on any device trying to associated with the
access point. Devices that do not support this feature will not be allowed to
associate with the access point.
WMM Acknowledge Policy – By default, all wireless data transmissions require
the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the receiver. WMM allows the
acknowledgement wait time to be turned off for each Access Category (AC).
Although this increases data throughput, it can also result in a high number of
errors when traffic levels are heavy. (Default: Acknowledge)
WMM BSS Parameters – These parameters apply to the wireless clients.
WMM AP Parameters – These parameters apply to the access point.
logCWMin (Minimum Contention Window) – The initial upper limit of the
random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted. The
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Interface
initial wait time is a random value between zero and the CWMin value. Specify
the CWMin value in the range 0-15 microseconds. Note that the CWMin value
must be equal or less than the CWMax value.
logCWMax (Maximum Contention Window) – The maximum upper limit of the
random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted. The
contention window is doubled after each detected collision up to the CWMax
value. Specify the CWMax value in the range 0-15 microseconds. Note that the
CWMax value must be greater or equal to the CWMin value.
AIFS (Arbitration Inter-Frame Space) – The minimum amount of wait time before
the next data transmission attempt. Specify the AIFS value in the range 0-15
microseconds.
TXOP Limit (Transmit Opportunity Limit) – The maximum time an AC transmit
queue has access to the wireless medium. When an AC queue is granted a
transmit opportunity, it can transmit data for a time up to the TxOpLimit. This
data bursting greatly improves the efficiency for high data-rate traffic. Specify a
value in the range 0-65535 microseconds.
Admission Control – The admission control mode for the access category. When
enabled, clients are blocked from using the access category. (Default: Disabled)
Key Type – See Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP).
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SECURITY
The access point is configured by default as an “open system,” which broadcasts
a beacon signal including the configured SSID. Wireless clients with an SSID
setting of “any” can read the SSID from the beacon and automatically set their
SSID to allow immediate connection to the nearest access point.
To improve wireless network security, you have to implement two main functions:
„
„
Authentication: It must be verified that clients attempting to connect to the
network are authorized users.
protected from interception and eavesdropping.
For a more secure network, the access point can implement one or a combination
of the following security mechanisms:
„
„
„
„
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP)
IEEE 802.1x
page 5-50
page 5-57
page 5-12
Wireless MAC address filtering
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA or WPA2) page 5-57
Both WEP and WPA security settings are configurable separately for each virtual
access point (VAP) interface. MAC address filtering, and RADIUS server settings
are global and apply to all VAP interfaces.
The security mechanisms that may be employed depend on the level of security
required, the network and management resources available, and the software
support provided on wireless clients.
A summary of wireless security considerations is listed in the following table.
Table 4 Wireless Security Considerations
Security
Mechanism
Client Support
Implementation Considerations
WEP
Built-in support on all 802.11a • Provides only weak security
and 802.11g devices
• Requires manual key management
WEP over 802.1X Requires 802.1X client support • Provides dynamic key rotation for improved WEP
in system or by add-in software security
(support provided in Windows • Requires configured RADIUS server
2000 SP3 or later and Windows
XP)
• 802.1X EAP type may require management of
digital certificates for clients and server
MAC Address
Filtering
Uses the MAC address of client • Provides only weak user authentication
network card
• Management of authorized MAC addresses
• Can be combined with other methods for
improved security
• Optionally configured RADIUS server
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
Security
Mechanism
Client Support
Implementation Considerations
WPA over 802.1X Requires WPA-enabled system • Provides robust security in WPA-only mode
Mode
and network card driver
(i.e., WPA clients only)
(native support provided in
Windows XP)
• Offers support for legacy WEP clients, but with
increased security risk (i.e., WEP authentication
keys disabled)
• Requires configured RADIUS server
• 802.1X EAP type may require management of
digital certificates for clients and server
WPA PSK Mode
Requires WPA-enabled system • Provides good security in small networks
and network card driver
• Requires manual management of pre-shared key
(native support provided in
Windows XP)
WPA2 with
802.1X
Requires WPA-enabled system • Provides the strongest security in WPA2-only
and network card driver (native
support provided in Windows
XP)
mode
• Provides robust security in mixed mode for WPA
and WPA2 clients
• Offers fast roaming for time-sensitive client
applications
• Requires configured RADIUS server
• 802.1X EAP type may require management of
digital certificates for clients and server
• Clients may require hardware upgrade to be
WPA2 compliant
WPA2 PSK Mode Requires WPA-enabled system • Provides robust security in small networks
and network card driver (native
support provided in Windows
XP)
• Requires manual management of pre-shared key
• Clients may require hardware upgrade to be
WPA2 compliant
NOTE: You must enable data encryption through the web in order to enable all
types of encryption (WEP, TKIP, or AES) in the access point.
The access point can simultaneously support clients using various different
security mechanisms. The configuration for these security combinations are
outlined in the following table. Note that MAC address authentication can be
configured independently to work with all security mechanisms and is indicated
separately in the table. Required RADIUS server support is also listed.
Table 5 Security Considerations
Configuration Summarya
Client Security
Combination
MAC
RADIUS
Server
Authenticationb
Yes3
No encryptionandno Authentication: Open System
Local, RADIUS, or
Disabled
authentication
Encryption: Disable
802.1x: Disable
Yesc
Static WEP only (with Enter 1 to 4 WEP keys
Local, RADIUS, or
Disabled
or without shared
key authentication)
Select a WEP transmit key for the interface
Authentication: Shared Key or Open System
Encryption: Enable
802.1x: Disable
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Configuration Summarya
Client Security
Combination
MAC
RADIUS
Server
Authenticationb
Yesc
Dynamic WEP
(802.1x) only
Authentication: Open System
Local, RADIUS, or
Disabled
Encryption: Enable
802.1x: Required
Set 802.1x key refresh and re authentication rates
802.1x WPA only
Authentication: WPA
Local only
Local only
Yes
No
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuration: Required
Cipher Suite: TKIP
802.1x: Required
Set 802.1x key refresh and re authentication rates
WPA Pre-Shared Key Authentication: WPA-PSK
only
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuration: Required
Cipher Configuration: TKIP
802.1x: Disable
WPA Pre-shared Key Type: Hexadecimal or
Alphanumeric
Enter a WPA Pre-shared key
Static and dynamic
(802.1x) WEP keys
Enter 1 to 4 WEP keys
Select a WEP transmit key
Local, RADIUS, or Yes
Disabled
Authentication: Open System
Encryption: Enable
802.1x: Supported
Set 802.1x key refresh and re authentication rates
Dynamic WEP and
802.1x WPA
Authentication: WPA
Local or Disabled
Local or Disabled
Yes
Yes
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuration: Supported
Cipher Suite: WEP
802.1x: Required
Set 802.1x key refresh and re authentication rates
Static and dynamic
(802.1x) WEP keys
and 802.1x WPA
Enter 1 to 4 WEP keys
Select a WEP transmit key
Authentication: WPA
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuration: Supported
Cipher Suite: WEP
802.1x: Supported
Set 802.1x key refresh and re authentication rates
802.1x WPA2 only
Authentication: WPA2
Local or Disabled
Local or Disabled
Yes
No
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuration: Required
Cipher Suite: AES-CCMP
802.1x: Required
Set 802.1x key refresh and re authentication rates
WPA2 Pre-Shared
Key only
Authentication: WPA2-PSK
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuration: Required
Cipher Suite: AES-CCMP
802.1x: Disable
WPA Pre-shared Key Type: Hexadecimal or
Alphanumeric
Enter a WPA Pre-shared key
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
Configuration Summarya
Client Security
Combination
MAC
RADIUS
Server
Authenticationb
802.1x WPA-WPA2
Mixed Mode
Authentication: WPA-WPA2-mixed
Encryption: Enable
Local or Disabled
Yes
WPA Configuration: Required
Cipher Suite: TKIP
802.1x: Required
Set 802.1x key refresh and re authentication rates
WPA-WPA2 Mixed
Authentication: WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixed
Local or Disabled
No
WPA Configuration: Required
Cipher Suite: TKIP
802.1x: Disable
WPA Pre-shared Key Type: Hexadecimal or
Alphanumeric
Enter a WPA Pre-shared key
a The configuration summary does not include the set up for MAC authentication (see page 5-10) or
RADIUS server (see page 5-8).
b The configuration of RADIUS MAC authentication together with 802.1x WPA or WPA Pre-shared
Key is not supported.
c RADIUS server required only when RADIUS MAC authentication is configured.
NOTE: If you choose to configure RADIUS MAC authentication together with
802.1X, the RADIUS MAC address authentication occurs prior to 802.1X
authentication. Only when RADIUS MAC authentication succeeds is 802.1X
authentication performed. When RADIUS MAC authentication fails, 802.1X
authentication is not performed.
WIRED EQUIVALENT PRIVACY (WEP)
WEP provides a basic level of security, preventing unauthorized access to the
network, and encrypting data transmitted between wireless clients and the access
point. WEP uses static shared keys (fixed-length hexadecimal or alphanumeric
strings) that are manually distributed to all clients that want to use the network.
WEP is the security protocol initially specified in the IEEE 802.11 standard for
wireless communications. Unfortunately, WEP has been found to be seriously
flawed and cannot be recommended for a high level of network security. For
more robust wireless security, the access point provides Wi-Fi Protected Access
(WPA) for improved data encryption and user authentication.
Setting up shared keys enables the basic IEEE 802.11 Wired Equivalent Privacy
(WEP) on the access point to prevent unauthorized access to the network.
If you choose to use WEP shared keys instead of an open system, be sure to
define at least one static WEP key for user authentication and data encryption.
Also, be sure that the WEP shared keys are the same for each client in the wireless
network.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Note that all clients share the same keys, which are used for user authentication
and data encryption. Up to four keys can be specified. These four keys are used
for all VAP interfaces on the same radio.
To set up WEP shared keys, click Radio Settings under 802.11a or 802.11b/g, then
select Authentication ‘Shared’. To use all other than WEP shared keys, select
Authentication ‘Open.’
The following example presumes that you have selected to opt for other methods
of encryption than WEP.
Figure 35 Authentication and Encryption
Authentication – Sets the access point to communicate as an open system that
accepts network access attempts from any client, or with clients using
pre-configured static shared keys. (Default: Open System)
„
Open System: If you don’t set up any other security mechanism on the access
point, the network has no protection and is open to all users. This is the default
setting.
„
Shared Key: Sets the access point to use WEP shared keys. If this option is
selected, you must configure at least one key on the access point and all clients.
NOTE: To use 802.1X on wireless clients requires a network card driver and
802.1X client software that supports the EAP authentication type that you want to
use. Windows 2000 SP3 or later and Windows XP provide 802.1X client support.
Windows XP also provides native WPA support. Other systems require additional
client software to support 802.1X and WPA.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
Encryption – Enable or disable the access point to use data encryption (WEP, TKIP,
or AES). If this option is selected when using static WEP keys, you must configure
at least one key on the access point and all clients. (Default: Disabled)
NOTE: You must enable data encryption through the web or CLI in order to enable
all types of encryption (WEP, TKIP, or AES) in the access point.
Cipher Modes – Selects an encryption method for the global key used for
multicast and broadcast traffic, which is supported by all wireless clients.
„
AES: AES-CCMP is used as the multicast encryption cipher. AES-CCMP is the
standard encryption cipher required for WPA2.
„
„
TKIP: TKIP is used as the multicast encryption cipher.
WEP/TKIP: WEP is used as the multicast encryption cipher. You should select
WEP only when both WPA and WEP clients are supported.
Figure 36 WPA Key Management
WPA Key Management – Specifies the type of WPA encryption to use:
„
„
WPA authentication over 802.1x – Requires the use of 802.1x authentication.
WPA Pre-shared Key (PSK) – Requires that 802.1x authentication be disabled.
Key Type – Select the preferred method of entering WEP encryption keys on the
access point and enter up to four keys:
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
„
„
„
Hexadecimal: Enter keys as 10 hexadecimal digits (0-9 and A-F) for 64 bit keys,
26 hexadecimal digits for 128 bit keys, or 32 hexadecimal digits for 152 bit keys
(802.11a radio only). This is the default setting.
Alphanumeric: Enter keys as 5 alphanumeric characters for 64 bit keys, 13
alphanumeric characters for 128 bit keys, or 16 alphanumeric characters for
152 bit keys (802.11a radio only).
Key – Selects the key number to use for encryption for each VAP interface. If
the clients have all four keys configured to the same values, you can change the
encryption key to any of the four settings without having to update the client
keys. (Default: Key 1)
Figure 37 WEP Keys
Client Types – Specifies the type of client to encrypt:
„
„
„
WEP and WPA clients – Both WEP and TKIP encryption are supported.
WPA clients only – All clients must support TKIP.
WEP clients only – All clients must support WEP.
WEP Configuration – Under open authentication it is still possible to configure
WEP keys.
„
Key Size – 64 Bit, 128 Bit, or 152 Bit key length. Note that the same size of
encryption key must be supported on all wireless clients. (Default: None)
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
„
Key Type – Select the preferred method of entering WEP encryption keys on the
access point and enter up to four keys:
• Hexadecimal: Enter keys as 10 hexadecimal digits (0-9 and A-F) for 64 bit
keys, 26 hexadecimal digits for 128 bit keys, or 32 hexadecimal digits for 152
bit keys (802.11a radio only). This is the default setting.
• Alphanumeric: Enter keys as 5 alphanumeric characters for 64 bit keys, 13
alphanumeric characters for 128 bit keys, or 16 alphanumeric characters for
152 bit keys (802.11a radio only).
Key – Selects the key number to use for encryption for each VAP interface. If the
clients have all four keys configured to the same values, you can change the
encryption key to any of the four settings without having to update the client
keys. (Default: Key 1)
NOTE: Key index and type must match that configured on the clients.
NOTE: In a mixed-mode environment with clients using static WEP keys and WPA,
select WEP transmit key index 2, 3, or 4. The access point uses transmit key index
1 for the generation of dynamic keys.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
WPA employs a combination of several technologies to provide an enhanced
security solution for 802.11 wireless networks.
The access point supports the following WPA components and features:
IEEE 802.1X and the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP): WPA employs
802.1X as its basic framework for user authentication and dynamic key
management. The 802.1X client and RADIUS server should use an appropriate
EAP type—such as EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security), EAP-TTLS (Tunneled TLS), or
PEAP (Protected EAP)—for strongest authentication. Working together, these
protocols provide “mutual authentication” between a client, the access point,
and a RADIUS server that prevents users from accidentally joining a rogue
network. Only when a RADIUS server has authenticated a user’s credentials will
encryption keys be sent to the access point and client.
NOTE: To implement WPA on wireless clients requires a WPA-enabled network
card driver and 802.1X client software that supports the EAP authentication type
that you want to use. Windows XP provides native WPA support, other systems
require additional software.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP): WPA specifies TKIP as the data
encryption method to replace WEP. TKIP avoids the problems of WEP static keys
by dynamically changing data encryption keys. Basically, TKIP starts with a master
(temporal) key for each user session and then mathematically generates other
keys to encrypt each data packet. TKIP provides further data encryption
enhancements by including a message integrity check for each packet and a
re-keying mechanism, which periodically changes the master key.
WPA Pre-Shared Key Mode (WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK): For enterprise deployment,
WPA requires a RADIUS authentication server to be configured on the wired
network. However, for small office networks that may not have the resources to
configure and maintain a RADIUS server, WPA provides a simple operating mode
that uses just a pre-shared password for network access. The Pre-Shared Key
mode uses a common password for user authentication that is manually entered
on the access point and all wireless clients. The PSK mode uses the same TKIP
packet encryption and key management as WPA in the enterprise, providing a
robust and manageable alternative for small networks.
Mixed WPA and WEP Client Support: WPA enables the access point to indicate
its supported encryption and authentication mechanisms to clients using its
beacon signal. WPA-compatible clients can likewise respond to indicate their WPA
support. This enables the access point to determine which clients are using WPA
security and which are using legacy WEP. The access point uses TKIP unicast data
encryption keys for WPA clients and WEP unicast keys for WEP clients. The global
encryption key for multicast and broadcast traffic must be the same for all clients,
therefore it restricts encryption to a WEP key.
When access is opened to both WPA and WEP clients, no authentication is
provided for the WEP clients through shared keys. To support authentication for
WEP clients in this mixed mode configuration, you can use either MAC
authentication or 802.1X authentication.
WPA2 – WPA was introduced as an interim solution for the vulnerability of WEP
pending the ratification of the IEEE 802.11i wireless security standard. In effect,
the WPA security features are a subset of the 802.11i standard. WPA2 includes
the now ratified 802.11i standard, but also offers backward compatibility with
WPA. Therefore, WPA2 includes the same 802.1X and PSK modes of operation
and support for TKIP encryption. The main differences and enhancements in
WPA2 can be summarized as follows:
„
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES): WPA2 uses AES Counter-Mode
encryption with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code
(CBC-MAC) for message integrity. The AES Counter-Mode/CBCMAC Protocol
(AES-CCMP) provides extremely robust data confidentiality using a 128-bit
key. The AES-CCMP encryption cipher is specified as a standard requirement
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
for WPA2. However, the computational intensive operations of AES-CCMP
requires hardware support on client devices. Therefore to implement WPA2 in
the network, wireless clients must be upgraded to WPA2-compliant hardware.
„
WPA2 Mixed-Mode: WPA2 defines a transitional mode of operation for
networks moving from WPA security to WPA2. WPA2 Mixed Mode allows
both WPA and WPA2 clients to associate to a common SSID interface. In
mixed mode, the unicast encryption cipher (TKIP or AES-CCMP) is negotiated
for each client. The access point advertises its supported encryption ciphers in
beacon frames and probe responses. WPA and WPA2 clients select the cipher
they support and return the choice in the association request to the access
point. For mixed-mode operation, the cipher used for broadcast frames is
always TKIP. WEP encryption is not allowed.
„
Key Caching: WPA2 provides fast roaming for authenticated clients by
retaining keys and other security information in a cache, so that if a client
roams away from an access point and then returns, re-authentication is not
required. When a WPA2 client is first authenticated, it receives a Pairwise
Master Key (PMK) that is used to generate other keys for unicast data
encryption. This key and other client information form a Security Association
that the access point names and holds in a cache.
„
Preauthentication: Each time a client roams to another access point it has to
be fully re-authenticated. This authentication process is time consuming and
can disrupt applications running over the network. WPA2 includes a
mechanism, known as pre-authentication, that allows clients to roam to a new
access point and be quickly associated. The first time a client is authenticated
to a wireless network it has to be fully authenticated. When the client is about
to roam to another access point in the network, the access point sends
pre-authentication messages to the new access point that include the client’s
security association information. Then when the client sends an association
request to the new access point, the client is known to be already
authenticated, so it proceeds directly to key exchange and association.
The configuration settings for WPA are summarized below:
Table 6 WPA Configuration Settings
WPA and WPA2 pre-shared key only
WPA and WPA2 over 802.1X
Encryption: Enabled
Encryption: Enabled
Authentication Setup: WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, or
WPA-WPA2-mixed
Authentication Setup: WPA, WPA2,
WPA-WPA2-mixed
Cipher Suite: WEP/TKIP/AES-CCMP
WPA Pre-shared Key Type: Hex/ASCII
Cipher Suite: WEP/TKIP/AES-CCMP
(requires RADIUS server to be specified)
1: You must enable data encryption in order to enable all types of encryption in the access point.
2: Select TKIP when any WPA clients do not support AES. Select AES only if all clients support AES.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Status Information
The Status page includes information on the following items:
Access Point Status
The AP Status window displays basic system configuration settings, as well as the
settings for the wireless interface.
Figure 38 AP Status
AP System Configuration – The AP System Configuration table displays the basic
system configuration settings:
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
System Up Time: Length of time the management agent has been up.
MAC Address: The physical layer address for the Ethernet port.
System Name: Name assigned to this system.
System Country Code: The country for which the device has been set for use.
System Contact: Administrator responsible for the system.
IP Address: IP address of the management interface for this device.
IP Default Gateway: IP address of the gateway router between this device and
management stations that exist on other network segments.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
„
„
„
„
HTTP Server: Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled.
HTTP Server Port: Shows the TCP port used by the HTTP interface.
Version: Shows the software version number.
802.1X: Shows if IEEE 802.1X access control for wireless clients is enabled.
AP Wireless Configuration – The AP Wireless Configuration tables display the
radio and VAP interface settings listed below. Note that Interface Wireless A refers
to the 802.11a radio and Interface Wireless G refers the 802.11b/g radio.
„
„
„
„
VAP: Displays the VAP number.
Radio Status: Displays if the radio is enabled or disabled for this VAP.
SSID: The service set identifier for the VAP interface.
Radio Channel: The radio channel through which the access point
communicates with wireless clients.
„
„
„
„
Radio Encryption: The key size used for data encryption.
Radio Auth. Type: Shows the type of authentication used.
Output Antenna: Displays which antenna/e are in use by the VAP.
MAC: The physical layer address of the radio interface.
Station Status
The Station Status window shows the wireless clients currently associated with
the access point.
Figure 39 Station Status
The Station Configuration page displays basic connection information for all
associated stations as described below. Note that this page is automatically
refreshed every five seconds.
„
„
Station Address: The MAC address of the wireless client.
Authenticated: Shows if the station has been authenticated. The two basic
methods of authentication supported for 802.11 wireless networks are “open
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
system” and “shared key.” Open-system authentication accepts any client
attempting to connect to the access point without verifying its identity. The
shared-key approach uses Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) to verify client
identity by distributing a shared key to stations before attempting
authentication.
„
Associated: Shows if the station has been successfully associated with the
access point. Once authentication is completed, stations can associate with
the current access point, or reassociate with a new access point. The
association procedure allows the wireless system to track the location of each
mobile client, and ensure that frames destined for each client are forwarded to
the appropriate access point.
„
„
Forwarding Allowed: Shows if the station has passed 802.1X authentication
and is now allowed to forward traffic to the access point.
Key Type – Displays one of the following:
• WEP Disabled – The client is not using Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP)
encryption keys.
• Dynamic – The client is using Wi-Fi Protected Access (802.1X or pre-shared
key mode) or using 802.1X authentication with dynamic keying.
• Static – The client is using static WEP keys for encryption.
Event Logs
The Event Logs window shows the log messages generated by the access point
and stored in memory.
Figure 40 Event Logs
The Event Logs table displays the following information:
„
„
Log Time: The time the log message was generated.
Event Level: The logging level associated with this message. For a description of
the various levels, see “logging level” on page 5-33.
„
Event Message: The content of the log message.
Error Messages – An example of a logged error message is: “Station Failed to
authenticate (unsupported algorithm).”
This message may be caused by any of the following conditions:
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
„
„
„
Access point was set to “Open Authentication”, but a client sent an
authentication request frame with a “Shared key.”
Access point was set to “Shared Key Authentication,” but a client sent an
authentication frame for “Open System.”
WEP keys do not match: When the access point uses “Shared Key
Authentication,” but the key used by client and access point are not the same,
the frame will be decrypted incorrectly, using the wrong algorithm and
sequence number.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
ACCESSING THE CLI
When accessing the management interface for the over a direct connection to
the console port, or via a Telnet connection, the access point can be managed by
entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the access
point’s command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a
UNIX system.
CONSOLE CONNECTION
To access the access point through the console port, perform these steps:
1. At the console prompt, enter the user name and password. (The default user
name is “admin” and the default password is “password”) When the user
name is entered, the CLI displays the “Outdoor 11a Building to Building #”
prompt.
2. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.
3. When finished, exit the session with the “exit” command.
After connecting to the system through the console port, the login screen
displays:
Username: admin
Password:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
NOTE: Command examples shown later in this chapter abbreviate the console
prompt to “AP” for simplicity.
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Telnet Connection
Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your
management station and any network device you want to manage over the
network must have a valid IP address. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers,
0 to 255, separated by periods. Each address consists of a network portion and
host portion. For example, if the access point cannot acquire an IP address from a
DHCP server, the default IP address used by the access point, 168.254.2.1,
consists of a network portion (168.254.2) and a host portion (1).
To access the access point through a Telnet session, you must first set the IP
address for the access point, and set the default gateway if you are managing the
access point from a different IP subnet. For example:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #configure
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#interface ethernet
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#ip address 10.1.0.1
255.255.255.0 10.1.0.254
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#
If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or
to the Internet, you need to apply for a registered IP address. However, if you are
attached to an isolated network, then you can use any IP address that matches
the network segment to which you are attached.
After you configure the access point with an IP address, you can open a Telnet
session by performing these steps.
1. From the remote host, enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the
device you want to access.
2. At the prompt, enter the user name and system password. The CLI will display
the “Outdoor 11a Building to Building #” prompt to show that you are using
executive access mode (i.e., Exec).
3. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.
4. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.
After entering the Telnet command, the login screen displays:
Username: admin
Password:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
NOTE: You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
ENTERING COMMANDS
This section describes how to enter CLI commands.
Keywords and Arguments
A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify a
command, and arguments specify configuration parameters. For example, in the
command “show interfaces ethernet,” show and interfaces are keywords, and
ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type.
You can enter commands as follows:
• To enter a simple command, enter the command keyword.
• To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required parameters after
the command keyword. For example, to set a password for the administrator,
enter:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#username smith
Minimum Abbreviation
The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a
command. For example, the command “configure” can be entered as con. If an
entry is ambiguous, the system will prompt for further input.
Command Completion
If you terminate input with a Tab key, the CLI will print the remaining characters
of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity. In the “configure” example,
typing con followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to
“configure.”
Getting Help on Commands
You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help
command. You can also display command syntax by following a command with
the “?” character to list keywords or parameters.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Showing Commands
If you enter a “?” at the command prompt, the system will display the first level
of keywords for the current configuration mode (Exec, Global Configuration, or
Interface). You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command.
For example, the command “show ?” displays a list of possible show commands:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show ?
APmanagement
Show management AP information.
authentication Show Authentication parameters
bootfile
bridge
Show bootfile name
Show bridge
config
System snapshot for tech support
Show DHCP Relay Configuration
Show event log on console
Show filters
Show hardware version
Display the session history
Show interface information
TTY line information
dhcp-relay
event-log
filters
hardware
history
interface
line
link-integrity Show link integrity information
logging
radius
rogue-ap
snmp
Show the logging buffers
Show radius server
Show Rogue ap Stations
Show snmp configuration
Show sntp configuration
Show 802.11 station table
Show system information
Show system version
sntp
station
system
version
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show
The command “show interface ?” will display the following information:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show interface ?
ethernet Show Ethernet interface
wireless Show wireless interface
<cr>
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show interface
Partial Keyword Lookup
If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark, alternatives that match
the initial letters are provided. (Remember not to leave a space between the
command and question mark.) For example “s?” shows all the keywords starting
with “s.”
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show s?
snmp
sntp
station system
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show s
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Negating the Effect of Commands
For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword “no” to
cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value.
For example, the logging command will log system messages to a host server. To
disable logging, specify the no logging command. This guide describes the
negation effect for all applicable commands.
Using Command History
The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered. You can scroll
back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key. Any
command displayed in the history list can be executed again, or first modified and
then executed.
Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed
commands.
Understanding Command Modes
The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes. Exec commands
generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters.
Configuration commands, on the other hand, modify interface parameters or
enable certain functions. These classes are further divided into different modes.
Available commands depend on the selected mode. You can always enter a
question mark “?” at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for
the current mode. The command classes and associated modes are displayed in
the following table:
Table 7 Command Modes
Class
Mode
Exec
Privileged
Configuration
Global
Interface-ethernet
Interface-wireless
Interface-wireless-vap
Exec Commands
When you open a new console session on an access point, the system enters Exec
command mode. Only a limited number of the commands are available in this
mode. You can access all other commands only from the configuration mode. To
access Exec mode, open a new console session with the user name “admin.” The
command prompt displays as “Outdoor 11a Building to Building #” for Exec
mode.
Username: admin
Password: [system login password]
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Configuration Commands
Configuration commands are used to modify access point settings. These
commands modify the running configuration and are saved in memory.
The configuration commands are organized into four different modes:
• Global Configuration (GC) - These commands modify the system level
configuration, and include commands such as username and password.
• Interface-Ethernet Configuration (IC-E) - These commands modify the Ethernet
port configuration, and include command such as dns and ip.
• Interface-Wireless Configuration (IC-W) - These commands modify the wireless
port configuration of global parameters for the radio, and include commands
such as channel and transmit-power.
• Interface-Wireless Virtual Access Point Configuration (IC-W-VAP) - These
commands modify the wireless port configuration for each VAP, and include
commands such as ssid and authentication.
To enter the Global Configuration mode, enter the command configure in Exec
mode. The system prompt will change to “Outdoor 11a Building to Building
(config)#” which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration
commands.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #configure
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
To enter Interface mode, you must enter the “interface ethernet,” or
“interface wireless a,” or “interface wireless g” command while in Global
Configuration mode. The system prompt will change to “Outdoor 11a Building to
Building (if-ethernet)#,” or Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless)”
indicating that you have access privileges to the associated commands. You can
use the end command to return to the Exec mode.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#interface ethernet
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#
Command Line Processing
Commands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and parameters
as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other
currently available commands or parameters. You can use the Tab key to
complete partial commands, or enter a partial command followed by the “?”
character to display a list of possible matches. You can also use the following
editing keystrokes for command-line processing:
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Table 8 Keystroke Commands
Keystroke
Ctrl-A
Ctrl-B
Ctrl-C
Ctrl-E
Ctrl-F
Ctrl-K
Ctrl-L
Ctrl-N
Ctrl-P
Ctrl-R
Ctrl-U
Ctrl-W
Esc-B
Function
Shifts cursor to start of command line.
Shifts cursor to the left one character.
Terminates a task and displays the command prompt.
Shifts cursor to end of command line.
Shifts cursor to the right one character.
Deletes from cursor to the end of the command line.
Repeats current command line on a new line.
Enters the next command line in the history buffer.
Shows the last command.
Repeats current command line on a new line.
Deletes the entire line.
Deletes the last word typed.
Moves the cursor backward one word.
Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word.
Moves the cursor forward one word.
Esc-D
Esc-F
Delete key or
backspace key
Erases a mistake when entering a command.
COMMAND GROUPS
The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown
below.
Table 9 Command Groups
Command Group
General
Description
Page
6-8
Basic commands for entering configuration mode, restarting the
system, or quitting the CLI
System Management Controls user name, password, web browser management options, and 6-13
a variety of other system information
System Logging
System Clock
DHCP Relay
Configures system logging parameters
6-32
6-37
6-42
Configures SNTP and system clock settings
Configures the access point to send DHCP requests from clients to
specified servers
SNMP
Configures community access strings and trap managers
Manages code image or access point configuration files
Configures the RADIUS client used with 802.1X authentication
6-44
6-61
6-65
6-71
6-78
Flash/File
RADIUS
802.1X Authentication Configures 802.1X authentication
MAC Address
Authentication
Configures MAC address authentication
Filtering
Filters communications between wireless clients, controls access to the 6-82
management interface from wireless clients, and filters traffic using
specific Ethernet protocol types
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Group
WDS Bridge
Description
Page
Configures WDS forwarding table settings
Configures spanning tree parameters
6-88
Spanning Tree
6-99
Ethernet Interface
Wireless Interface
Wireless Security
Configures connection parameters for the Ethernet interface
Configures radio interface settings
6-105
6-111
6-133
6-133
Configures radio interface security and encryption settings
Rogue AP Detection Configures settings for the detection of rogue access points in the
network
Link Integrity
IAPP
Configures a link check to a host device on the wired network
Enables roaming between multi-vendor access points
Configures VLAN membership
6-150
6-153
6-154
6-158
VLANs
WMM
Configures WMM quality of service parameters
The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these
abbreviations: Exec (Executive Mode), GC (Global Configuration), IC-E
(Interface-Ethernet Configuration), IC-W (Interface-Wireless Configuration), and
IC-W-VAP (Interface-Wireless VAP Configuration).
General Commands
Table 10 General Commands
Command
configure
end
Function
Mode
Exec
Page
6-8
Activates global configuration mode
Returns to previous configuration mode
Returns to the previous configuration mode, or exits the CLI
GC, IC
any
6-9
exit
6-10
6-10
ping
Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the
network
Exec
reset
Restarts the system
Exec
Exec
6-11
6-12
show history
show line
Shows the command history buffer
configure
This command activates Global Configuration mode. You must enter this mode to
modify most of the settings on the access point. You must also enter Global
Configuration mode prior to enabling the context modes for Interface
Configuration. See “Using the Command Line Interface” on page 1.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #configure
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
end (6-9)
end
This command returns to the previous configuration mode.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration, Interface Configuration
Example
This example shows how to return to the Configuration mode from the Interface
Configuration mode:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#end
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
exit
This command returns to the Exec mode or exits the configuration program.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Any
Example
This example shows how to return to the Exec mode from the Interface
Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#exit
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #exit
CLI session with the Access Point is now closed
Username:
ping
This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the
network.
Syntax
ping <host_name | ip_address>
• host_name - Alias of the host.
• ip_address - IP address of the host.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
• Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be
reached.
• The following are some results of the ping command:
- Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds,
depending on network traffic.
- Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a
“timeout” appears in ten seconds.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
- Destination unreachable - The gateway for this destination indicates that
the destination is unreachable.
- Network or host unreachable - The gateway found no corresponding
entry in the route table.
• Press <Esc> to stop pinging.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #ping 10.1.0.19
192.254.2.19 is alive
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
reset
This command restarts the system or restores the factory default settings.
Syntax
reset <board | configuration>
• board - Reboots the system.
• configuration - Resets the configuration settings to the factory defaults,
and then reboots the system.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test.
Example
This example shows how to reset the system:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #reset board
Reboot system now? <y/n>: y
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
show history
This command shows the contents of the command history buffer.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
• The history buffer size is fixed at 10 commands.
• Use the up or down arrow keys to scroll through the commands in the
history buffer.
Example
In this example, the show history command lists the contents of the command
history buffer:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show history
config
exit
show history
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
show line
This command displays the console port’s configuration settings.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
The console port settings are fixed at the values shown below.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show line
Console Line Information
======================================================
databits
parity
speed
: 8
: none
: 9600
stop bits : 1
======================================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
System Management Commands
These commands are used to configure the user name, password, system logs,
browser management options, clock settings, and a variety of other system
information.
Table 11 System Management Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Exec
Page
Country Setting
country
Sets the access point country code
6--13
Device Designation
prompt
Customizes the command line prompt
Specifies the host name for the access point
Sets the system contact string
GC
GC
GC
GC
6--15
6-16
6-46
6-47
system name
snmp-server contact
snmp-server location
Management Access
username
Sets the system location string
Configures the user name for management access
Specifies the password for management access
Enables the Secure Shell server
GC
6-16
6-17
6-17
6-18
6-18
6-23
password
GC
ip ssh-server enable
ip ssh-server port
IC-E
IC-E
IC-E
Sets the Secure Shell port
ip telnet-server enable Enables the Telnet server
APmgmtIP
Specifies an IP address or range of addresses allowed access GC
to the management interface
APmgmtUI
Enables or disables SNMP, Telnet or web management access GC
6-24
6-25
show APmanagement Shows the AP management configuration
Web Server
Exec
ip http port
Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface GC
6-19
6-19
ip http server
Allows the access point to be monitored or configured from GC
a browser
ip https port
Specifies the UDP port number used for a secure HTTP
connection to the access point’s Web interface
GC
6-20
ip https server
web-redirect
Enables the secure HTTP server on the access point
GC
6-21
6-22
Enables web authentication of clients using a public access GC
Internet service
System Status
show system
show version
show config
show hardware
Displays system information
Exec
6-26
6-27
6-27
6-32
Displays version information for the system
Displays detailed configuration information for the system
Displays the access point’s hardware version
Exec
Exec
Exec
country
This command configures the access point’s country code, which identifies the
country of operation and sets the authorized radio channels.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Syntax
country <country_code>
country_code - A two character code that identifies the country of
operation. See the following table for a full list of codes.
Table 12 Country Codes
Country
Albania
Code
AL
Country
Code
DO
Country
Kuwait
Code
KW
Country
Romania
Code
RO
Dominican
Republic
Algeria
Argentina
Armenia
Australia
Austria
DZ
AR
AM
AU
AT
Ecuador
Egypt
EC
EG
EE
Latvia
Lebanon
Liechtenstein
Lithuania
Macao
LV
LB
LI
Russia
Saudi Arabia
Singapore
RU
SA
SG
SK
ES
Estonia
Finland
FI
LT Slovak Republic
France
FR
MO
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Syria
Azerbaijan
Bahrain
AZ
BH
BY
BE
Georgia
Germany
Greece
GE
DE
GR
GT
HN
HK
Macedonia
Malaysia
Malta
MK
MY
MT
MX
MC
MA
SE
CH
SY
TW
TH
TT
Belarus
Belgium
Guatemala
Honduras
Hong Kong
Mexico
Taiwan
Monaco
Thailand
Belize
BZ
Morocco
Trinidad &
Tobago
Bolivia
Brazil
BO
BR
BN
Hungary
Iceland
India
HU
IS
Netherlands
New Zealand
Norway
NL
NZ
Tunisia
Turkey
TN
TR
Brunei
Darussalam
IN
NO
Ukraine
UA
Bulgaria
BG
Indonesia
ID
Qatar
QA
United Arab
Emirates
AE
Canada
Chile
CA
CL
Iran
Ireland
Israel
IR
IE
Oman
Pakistan
Panama
Peru
OM United Kingdom
GB
US
UY
UZ
YE
VE
VN
PK
PA
PE
PH
PL
United States
Uruguay
China
CN
CO
CR
HR
CY
IL
Colombia
Costa Rica
Croatia
Cyprus
Italy
IT
Uzbekistan
Yemen
Japan
JP
JO
KZ
Philippines
Poland
Jordan
Venezuela
Vietnam
Kazakhstan
Portugal
PT
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Country
Czech Republic
Denmark
Code
CZ
Country
Code
KP
Country
Puerto Rico
Slovenia
Code
PR
Country
Code
ZW
North Korea
Zimbabwe
DK
Korea
Republic
KR
SI
Elsalvador
SV Luxembourg
LU
South Africa
ZA
Default Setting
US - for units sold in the United States
99 (no country set) - for units sold in other countries
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
• If you purchased an access point outside of the United States, the country
code must be set before radio functions are enabled.
• The available Country Code settings can be displayed by using the
country ? command.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #country tw
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
prompt
This command customizes the CLI prompt. Use the no form to restore the default
prompt.
Syntax
prompt <string>
no prompt
string - Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt.
(Maximum length: 32 characters)
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
Outdoor 11a Building to Building
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#prompt RD2
RD2(config)#
system name
This command specifies or modifies the system name for this device. Use the no
form to restore the default system name.
Syntax
system name <name>
no system name
name - The name of this host.
(Maximum length: 32 characters)
Default Setting
Outdoor 11a Building to Building
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#system name AP
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
username
This command configures the user name for management access.
Syntax
username <name>
name - The name of the user.
(Length: 3-16 characters, case sensitive)
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Default Setting
admin
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#username bob
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
password
After initially logging onto the system, you should set the password. Remember
to record it in a safe place. Use the no form to reset the default password.
Syntax
password <password>
no password
password - Password for management access.
(Length: 3-16 characters, case sensitive)
Default Setting
null
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#password
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
ip ssh-server enable
This command enables the Secure Shell server. Use the no form to disable the
server.
Syntax
ip ssh-server enable
no ip ssh-server
Default Setting
Disabled
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• The access point supports Secure Shell version 2.0 only.
• After boot up, the SSH server needs about two minutes to generate host
encryption keys. The SSH server is disabled while the keys are being
generated. The show system command displays the status of the SSH
server.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-ethernet)#ip ssh-server enable
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-ethernet)#
ip ssh-server port
This command sets the Secure Shell server port. Use the no form to disable the
server.
Syntax
ip ssh-server port <port-number>
• port-number - The UDP port used by the SSH server. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
22
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-ethernet)#ip ssh-server port 1124
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-ethernet)#
ip telnet-server enable
This command enables the Telnet server. Use the no form to disable the server.
Syntax
ip telnet-server enable
no ip telnet-server
Default Setting
Interface enabled
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-ethernet)#ip telnet-server enable
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-ethernet)#
ip http port
This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface.
Use the no form to use the default port.
Syntax
ip http port <port-number>
no ip http port
port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.
(Range: 1024-65535)
Default Setting
80
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#ip http port 769
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
ip http server (6-19)
ip http server
This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser.
Use the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip http server
Default Setting
Enabled
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#ip http server
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
ip http port (6-19)
ip https port
Use this command to specify the UDP port number used for HTTPS/SSL
connection to the access point’s Web interface. Use the no form to restore the
default port.
Syntax
ip https port <port_number>
no ip https port
port_number – The UDP port used for HTTPS/SSL.
(Range: 80, 1024-65535)
Default Setting
443
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port.
• To avoid using common reserved TCP port numbers below 1024, the
configurable range is restricted to 443 and between 1024 and 65535.
• If you change the HTTPS port number, clients attempting to connect to the
HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL, in this format:
https://device:port_number
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#ip https port 1234
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
ip https server
Use this command to enable the secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) over
the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted
connection) to the access point’s Web interface. Use the no form to disable this
function.
Syntax
[no] ip https server
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently.
• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL:
https://device:port_number]
• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:
- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.
- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the
connection.
- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting
data.
• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.
A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#ip https server
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
web-redirect
Use this command to enable web-based authentication of clients. Use the no
form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] web-redirect
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The web redirect feature is used to support billing for a public access
wireless network. After successful association to an access point, a client is
“redirected” to an access point login web page as soon as Internet access
password on the web page. This process allows controlled access for clients
without requiring 802.1X or MAC authentication.
• Web redirect requires a RADIUS server on the wired network with
configured user names and passwords for authentication. The RADIUS
server details must also be configured on the access point. (See “show
bootfile” on page 65.)
• Use the show system command to display the current web redirect status.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#web-redirect
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
APmgmtIP
This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management
access to the access point through various protocols.
NOTE: Secure Web (HTTPS) connections are not affected by the UI Management
or IP Management settings.
Syntax
APmgmtIP <multiple IP_address subnet_mask | single IP_address | any>
• multiple - Adds IP addresses within a specifiable range to the SNMP, web
and Telnet groups.
• single - Adds an IP address to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.
• any - Allows any IP address access through SNMP, web and Telnet groups.
• IP_address - Adds IP addresses to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.
• subnet_mask - Specifies a range of IP addresses allowed management
access.
Default Setting
All addresses
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the access point from
an invalid address, the unit will reject the connection, enter an event
message in the system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.
• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively.
Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses,
either individual addresses or address ranges.
• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or Telnet),
the access point will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering
addresses for different groups, the access point will accept overlapping
address ranges.
• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must
delete the entire range, and reenter the addresses.
• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by
specifying both the start address and end address.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#apmgmtip multiple 192.254.1.50
255.255.255.0
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
APmgmtUI
This command enables and disables management access to the access point
through SNMP, Telnet and web interfaces.
NOTE: Secure Web (HTTPS) connections are not affected by the UI Management
or IP Management settings.
Syntax
APmgmtUI <[SNMP | Telnet | Web] enable | disable>
• SNMP - Specifies SNMP management access.
• Telnet - Specifies Telnet management access.
• Web - Specifies web based management access.
- enable/disable - Enables or disables the selected management access
method.
Default Setting
All enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#apmgmtui SNMP enable
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
show apmanagement
This command shows the AP management configuration, including the IP
addresses of management stations allowed to access the access point, as well as
the interface protocols which are open to management access.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show apmanagement
Management AP Information
=================================
AP Management IP Mode: Any IP
Telnet UI: Enable
WEB UI
: Enable
SNMP UI : Enable
==================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
show system
This command displays basic system configuration settings.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show system
System Information
==========================================================
Serial Number
System Up time
System Name
System Location
System Contact
System Country Code
MAC Address
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
VLAN State
: A123456789
: 0 days, 4 hours, 33 minutes, 29 seconds
: Enterprise Wireless AP
:
:
: US - UNITED STATES
: 00-30-F1-F0-9A-9C
: 192.254.2.1
: 255.255.255.0
: 0.0.0.0
: DISABLED
Management VLAN ID(AP): 1
IAPP State
: ENABLED
DHCP Client
HTTP Server
HTTP Server Port
HTTPS Server
HTTPS Server Port
: ENABLED
: ENABLED
: 80
: ENABLED
: 443
Slot Status
: Dual band(a/g)
: v3.0.3
: v4.3.1.9
: ENABLED
: 22
: ENABLED
: DISABLED
: DISABLED
: DISABLED
Boot Rom Version
Software Version
SSH Server
SSH Server Port
Telnet Server
WEB Redirect
DHCP Relay
Proxy ARP
==========================================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
show version
This command displays the software version for the system.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show version
Version Information
=========================================
Version: v4.3.2.2
Date
: Dec 20 2005, 18:38:12
=========================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
show config
This command displays detailed configuration information for the system.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show config
Authentication Information
===========================================================
MAC Authentication Server
: DISABLED
MAC Auth Session Timeout Value : 0 min
802.1x supplicant
: DISABLED
802.1x supplicant user
802.1x supplicant password
Address Filtering
: EMPTY
: EMPTY
: ALLOWED
System Default : ALLOW addresses not found in filter table.
Filter Table
-----------------------------------------------------------
No Filter Entries.
Bootfile Information
===================================
Bootfile : ec-img.bin
===================================
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Protocol Filter Information
===========================================================
Local Bridge
AP Management
:DISABLED
:ENABLED
Ethernet Type Filter :DISABLED
Enabled Protocol Filters
-----------------------------------------------------------
No protocol filters are enabled
===========================================================
Hardware Version Information
===========================================
Hardware version R01A
===========================================
Ethernet Interface Information
========================================
IP Address
: 192.254.0.151
: 255.255.255.0
: 192.254.0.1
: 210.200.211.225
: 210.200.211.193
: 100Base-TX Full Duplex
: Up
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Speed-duplex
Admin status
Operational status : Up
========================================
Wireless Interface 802.11a Information
===========================================================
----------------Identification-----------------------------
Description
SSID
: 802.11a Access Point
: A 0
Channel
Status
: 0 (AUTO)
: Disable
----------------802.11 Parameters--------------------------
Transmit Power
Data Rate
: 100% (5 dBm)
: 54Mbps
Fragmentation Threshold
RTS Threshold
Beacon Interval
DTIM Interval
Maximum Association
Native VLAN ID
: 2346 bytes
: 2347 bytes
: 100 TUs
: 1 beacon
: 64 stations
: 1
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
----------------Security-----------------------------------
Closed System
: DISABLED
: WEP
Multicast cipher
Unicast cipher
WPA clients
WPA Key Mgmt Mode
WPA PSK Key Type
Encryption
: TKIP and AES
: REQUIRED
: PRE SHARED KEY
: ALPHANUMERIC
: DISABLED
: 1
Default Transmit Key
Static Keys :
Key 1: EMPTY
Key Length :
Key 2: EMPTY
Key 3: EMPTY
Key 3: ZERO
Key 4: EMPTY
Key 4: ZERO
Key 1: ZERO
Key 2: ZERO
: OPEN
: Disabled
Authentication Type
Rogue AP Detection
Rogue AP Scan Interval
Rogue AP Scan Duration
: 720 minutes
: 350 milliseconds
===========================================================
Console Line Information
===========================================================
databits
parity
speed
: 8
: none
: 9600
stop bits : 1
===========================================================
Logging Information
=====================================================
Syslog State
Logging Console State
Logging Level
Logging Facility Type
Servers
: Disabled
: Disabled
: Informational
: 16
1: 0.0.0.0
2: 0.0.0.0
3: 0.0.0.0
4: 0.0.0.0
, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
======================================================
Radius Server Information
========================================
IP
Port
Key
Retransmit
Timeout
: 0.0.0.0
: 1812
: *****
: 3
: 5
Radius MAC format : no-delimiter
Radius VLAN format : HEX
========================================
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Radius Secondary Server Information
========================================
IP
Port
Key
Retransmit
Timeout
: 0.0.0.0
: 1812
: *****
: 3
: 5
Radius MAC format : no-delimiter
Radius VLAN format : HEX
========================================
SNMP Information
==============================================
Service State
Community (ro)
Community (rw)
Location
: Disable
: ********
: ********
:
Contact
: Contact
EngineId
:80:00:07:e5:80:00:00:29:f6:00:00:00:0c
EngineBoots:2
Trap Destinations:
1:
2:
3:
4:
0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled
0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled
0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled
0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled
dot11InterfaceAGFail Enabled
dot11StationAssociation Enabled
dot11StationReAssociation Enabled
dot1xAuthFail Enabled
dot11InterfaceBFail Enabled
dot11StationAuthentication Enabled
dot11StationRequestFail Enabled
dot1xAuthNotInitiated Enabled
dot1xMacAddrAuthFail Enabled
iappContextDataSent Enabled
iappStationRoamedTo Enabled
localMacAddrAuthSuccess Enabled
sntpServerFail Enabled
dot1xAuthSuccess Enabled
dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess Enabled
iappStationRoamedFrom Enabled
localMacAddrAuthFail Enabled
pppLogonFail Enabled
configFileVersionChanged Enabled
systemDown Enabled
radiusServerChanged Enabled
systemUp Enabled
=============================================
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
SNTP Information
===========================================================
Service State
SNTP (server 1) IP
SNTP (server 2) IP
Current Time
Time Zone
Daylight Saving
: Disabled
: 137.92.140.80
: 192.43.244.18
: 00 : 14, Jan 1st, 1970
: -5 (BOGOTA, EASTERN, INDIANA)
: Disabled
===========================================================
Station Table Information
===========================================================
if-wireless A VAP [0]
802.11a Channel : Auto
:
No 802.11a Channel Stations.
.
.
.
if-wireless G VAP [0]
802.11g Channel : Auto
:
No 802.11g Channel Stations.
.
.
.
System Information
==============================================================
Serial Number
System Up time
System Name
System Location
System Contact
System Country Code
MAC Address
:
: 0 days, 0 hours, 16 minutes, 51 seconds
: Enterprise Wireless AP
:
: Contact
: 99 - NO_COUNTRY_SET
: 00-12-CF-05-B7-84
: 192.254.0.151
IP Address
Subnet Mask
: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
VLAN State
: 192.254.0.1
: DISABLED
Management VLAN ID(AP): 1
IAPP State
: ENABLED
DHCP Client
HTTP Server
HTTP Server Port
HTTPS Server
HTTPS Server Port
Slot Status
: ENABLED
: ENABLED
: 80
: ENABLED
: 443
: Dual band(a/g)
: v3.0.7
: v4.3.2.2
Boot Rom Version
Software Version
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
SSH Server
SSH Server Port
: ENABLED
: 22
Telnet Server
WEB Redirect
DHCP Relay
: ENABLED
: DISABLED
: DISABLED
==============================================================
Version Information
=========================================
Version: v4.3.2.2
Date
: Dec 20 2005, 18:38:12
=========================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
show hardware
This command displays the hardware version of the system.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show hardware
Hardware Version Information
===========================================
Hardware version R01
===========================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
System Logging Commands
These commands are used to configure system logging on the access point.
Table 13 System Loggign Commands
Command
logging on
logging host
Function
Mode
GC
Page
6-33
6-33
Controls logging of error messages
Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive
logging messages
GC
logging console
logging level
Initiates logging of error messages to the console
Defines the minimum severity level for event logging
GC
GC
GC
6-34
6-34
6-35
logging facility-type
Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog
messages
logging clear
show logging
show event-log
Clears all log entries in access point memory
Displays the state of logging
GC
6-36
6-36
6-37
Exec
Exec
Displays all log entries in access point memory
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
logging on
This command controls logging of error messages; i.e., sending debug or error
messages to memory. The no form disables the logging process.
Syntax
[no] logging on
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The logging process controls error messages saved to memory. You can use
the logging level command to control the type of error messages that are
stored in memory.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#logging on
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
logging host
This command specifies syslog servers host that will receive logging messages.
Use the no form to remove syslog server host.
Syntax
logging host <1 | 2 | 3 | 4> <host_name | host_ip_address> [udp_port]
no logging host <1 | 2 | 3 | 4>
• 1 - First syslog server.
• 2 - Second syslog server.
• 3 - Third syslog server.
• 4 - Fourth syslog server.
• host_name - The name of a syslog server. (Range: 1-20 characters)
• host_ip_address - The IP address of a syslog server.
• udp_port - The UDP port used by the syslog server.
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#logging host 1 10.1.0.3
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
logging console
This command initiates logging of error messages to the console. Use the no
form to disable logging to the console.
Syntax
[no] logging console
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#logging console
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
logging level
This command sets the minimum severity level for event logging.
Syntax
logging level <Emergency | Alert | Critical | Error | Warning | Notice |
Informational | Debug>
Default Setting
Informational
Command Mode
Global Configuration
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Command Usage
Messages sent include the selected level down to Emergency level.
Level Argument
Description
Emergency
Alert
System unusable
Immediate action needed
Critical
Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error - resource
exhausted)
Error
Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)
Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)
Normal but significant condition, such as cold start
Informational messages only
Warning
Notice
Informational
Debug
Debugging messages
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#logging level alert
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
logging facility-type
This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages.
Syntax
logging facility-type <type>
type - A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to
dispatch log messages to an appropriate service. (Range: 16-23)
Default Setting
16
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See
RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the
access point. However, it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages
or to store messages in the corresponding database.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#logging facility 19
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
logging clear
This command clears all log messages stored in the access point’s memory.
Syntax
logging clear
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#logging clear
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
show logging
This command displays the logging configuration.
Syntax
show logging
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show logging
Logging Information
============================================
Syslog State
Logging Console State
Logging Level
Logging Facility Type
Servers
: Enabled
: Enabled
: Alert
: 16
1: 192.254.2.19, UDP Port: 514, State: Enabled
2: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
3: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
4: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
=============================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
show event-log
This command displays log messages stored in the access point’s memory.
Syntax
show event-log
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show event-log
Mar 09 11:57:55 Information: 802.11g:11g Radio Interface Enabled
Mar 09 11:57:55 Information: 802.11g:Radio channel updated to 8
Mar 09 11:57:34 Information: 802.11g:11g Radio Interface Enabled
Mar 09 11:57:18 Information: 802.11g:11g Radio Interface Enabled
Mar 09 11:56:35 Information: 802.11a:11a Radio Interface Enabled
Mar 09 11:55:52 Information: SSH task: Set SSH server port to 22
Mar 09 11:55:52 Information: SSH task: Enable SSH server.
Mar 09 11:55:52 Information: Enable Telnet.
Mar 09 11:55:40 Information: 802.11a:11a Radio Interface Disabled
Mar 09 11:55:40 Information: 802.11a:Transmit Power set to QUARTER
Press <n> next. <p> previous. <a> abort. <y> continue to end :
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #configure
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CTRL/Z
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#logging clear
System Clock Commands
These commands are used to configure SNTP and system clock settings on the
access point.
Table 14 System Clock Commands
Command
Function
Mode
GC
Page
6-38
6-38
6-39
6-40
sntp-server ip
Specifies one or more time servers
Accepts time from the specified time servers
Manually sets the system date and time
Sets the start and end dates for daylight savings time
sntp-server enable
sntp-server date-time
GC
GC
sntp-server
daylight-saving
GC
sntp-server timezone
show sntp
Sets the time zone for the access point’s internal clock
Shows current SNTP configuration settings
GC
6-40
6-41
Exec
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
sntp-server ip
This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are
issued. Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from
the current list.
Syntax
sntp-server ip <1 | 2> <ip>
• 1 - First time server.
• 2 - Second time server.
• ip - IP address of an time server (NTP or SNTP).
Default Setting
137.92.140.80
192.43.244.18
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
When SNTP client mode is enabled using the sntp-server enable
command, the sntp-server ip command specifies the time servers from
which the access point polls for time updates. The access point will poll the
time servers in the order specified until a response is received.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#sntp-server ip 10.1.0.19
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
Related Commands
sntp-server enable (6-38)
show sntp (6-41)
sntp-server enable
This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization with NTP or
SNTP time servers specified by the sntp-server ip command. Use the no form to
disable SNTP client requests.
Syntax
[no] sntp-server enable
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and
times for log events. Without SNTP, the access point only records the time
starting from the factory default set at the last bootup (i.e., 00:14:00,
January 1, 1970).
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#sntp-server enable
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
sntp-server ip (6-38)
show sntp (6-41)
sntp-server date-time
This command sets the system clock.
Default Setting
00:14:00, January 1, 1970
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
This example sets the system clock to 17:37 June 19, 2003.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #sntp-server date-time
Enter Year<1970-2100>: 2003
Enter Month<1-12>: 6
Enter Day<1-31>: 19
Enter Hour<0-23>: 17
Enter Min<0-59>: 37
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Related Commands
sntp-server enable (6-38)
sntp-server daylight-saving
This command sets the start and end dates for daylight savings time. Use the no
form to disable daylight savings time.
Syntax
[no] sntp-server daylight-saving
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The command sets the system clock back one hour during the specified
period.
Example
This sets daylight savings time to be used from July 1st to September 1st.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#sntp-server daylight-saving
Enter Daylight saving from which month<1-12>: 6
and which day<1-31>: 1
Enter Daylight saving end to which month<1-12>: 9
and which day<1-31>: 1
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
sntp-server timezone
This command sets the time zone for the access point’s internal clock.
Syntax
sntp-server timezone <hours>
hours - Number of hours before/after UTC.
(Range: -12 to +12 hours)
Default Setting
-5 (BOGOTA, EASTERN, INDIANA)
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT), based on the earth’s
prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to
your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your
time zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#sntp-server timezone +8
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
show sntp
This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP
client.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show sntp
SNTP Information
=========================================================
Service State
SNTP (server 1) IP
SNTP (server 2) IP
Current Time
Time Zone
Daylight Saving
: Enabled
: 137.92.140.80
: 192.43.244.18
: 08 : 04, Jun 20th, 2003
: +8 (TAIPEI, BEIJING)
: Enabled, from Jun, 1st to Sep, 1st
=========================================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
DHCP Relay Commands
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) can dynamically allocate an IP
address and other configuration information to network clients that broadcast a
request. To receive the broadcast request, the DHCP server would normally have
to be on the same subnet as the client. However, when the access point’s DHCP
relay agent is enabled, received client requests can be forwarded directly by the
to clients.
Table 15 DHCP Relay Commands
Command
Function
Mode
GC
Page
6-42
6-43
dhcp-relay enable
dhcp-relay
Enables the DHCP relay agent
Sets the primary and secondary DHCP server GC
address
show dhcp-relay
Shows current DHCP relay configuration
settings
Exec
6-43
dhcp-relay enable
This command enables the access point’s DHCP relay agent. Use the no form to
disable the agent.
Syntax
[no] dhcp-relay enable
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• For the DHCP relay agent to function, the primary DHCP server must be
configured using the dhcp-relay primary command. A secondary DHCP
server does not need to be configured, but it is recommended.
• If there is no response from the primary DHCP server, and a secondary
server has been configured, the agent will then attempt to send DHCP
requests to the secondary server.
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#dhcp-relay enable
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
dhcp-relay
This command configures the primary and secondary DHCP server addresses.
Syntax
dhcp-relay <primary | secondary> <ip_address>
• primary - The primary DHCP server.
• secondary - The secondary DHCP server.
• ip_address - IP address of the server.
Default Setting
Primary and secondary: 0.0.0.0
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#dhcp-relay primary 192.254.2.10
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
show dhcp-relay
This command displays the current DHCP relay configuration.
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show dhcp-relay
DHCP Relay
: ENABLED
Primary DHCP Server
: 192.254.2.10
Secondary DHCP Server : 0.0.0.0
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
SNMP Commands
Controls access to this access point from management stations using the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the hosts that will receive trap
messages.
Table 16 SNMP Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
6-46
snmp-server community
Sets up the community access string to permit access GC
to SNMP commands
snmp-server contact
snmp-server location
snmp-server enable server
snmp-server host
Sets the system contact string
Sets the system location string
Enables SNMP service and traps
GC
GC
GC
GC
6-46
6-47
6-48
6-48
Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification
operation
snmp-server trap
Enables specific SNMP notifications
Sets the engine ID for SNMP v3
GC
GC
GC
GC
GC
GC
6-49
6-51
6-52
6-53
6-54
6-56
snmp-server engine id
snmp-server user
snmp-server targets
snmp-server filter
Sets the name of the SNMP v3 user
Configures SNMP v3 notification targets
Configures SNMP v3 notification filters
Assigns SNMP v3 notification filters to targets
snmp-server
filter-assignments
show snmp groups
show snmp users
Displays the pre-defined SNMP v3 groups
Displays SNMP v3 user settings
Exec
Exec
6-56
6-57
6-57
show snmp
group-assignments
Displays the assignment of users to SNMP v3 groups Exec
show snmp target
Displays the SNMP v3 notification targets Exec
6-58
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Command
Function
Mode
Exec
Page
6-58
6-59
show snmp filter
Displays the SNMP v3 notification filters
show snmp
filter-assignments
Displays the SNMP v3 notification filter assignments Exec
show snmp
Displays the status of SNMP communications Exec
6-60
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
snmp-server community
This command defines the community access string for the Simple Network
Management Protocol. Use the no form to remove the specified community
string.
Syntax
snmp-server community string [ro | rw]
no snmp-server community string
• string - Community string that acts like a password and permits access to
the SNMP protocol. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive)
• ro - Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are only
able to retrieve MIB objects.
• rw - Specifies read/write access. Authorized management stations are
able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Default Setting
• public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able
to retrieve MIB objects.
• private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to
both retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
If you enter a community string without the ro or rw option, the default is
read only.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#snmp-server community alpha rw
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
snmp-server contact
This command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove the
system contact information.
Syntax
snmp-server contact string
no snmp-server contact
string - String that describes the system contact. (Maximum length: 255
characters)
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#snmp-server contact Paul
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server location (6-47)
snmp-server location
This command sets the system location string. Use the no form to remove the
location string.
Syntax
snmp-server location <text>
no snmp-server location
text - String that describes the system location.
(Maximum length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#snmp-server location WC-19
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server contact (6-46)
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
snmp-server enable server
This command enables SNMP management access and also enables this device to
send SNMP traps (i.e., notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP service and
trap messages.
Syntax
snmp-server enable server
no snmp-server enable server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• This command enables both authentication failure notifications and
link-up-down notifications.
• The snmp-server host command specifies the host device that will
receive SNMP notifications.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#snmp-server enable server
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server host (6-48)
snmp-server host
This command specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification. Use the no form to
remove the specified host.
Syntax
snmp-server host <1 | 2 | 3 | 4> <host_ip_address | host_name>
<community-string>
no snmp-server host
• 1 - First SNMP host.
• 2 - Second SNMP host.
• 3 - Third SNMP host.
• 4 - Fourth SNMP host.
• host_ip_address - IP of the host (the targeted recipient).
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
• host_name - Name of the host. (Range: 1-63 characters)
• community-string - Password-like community string sent with the
notification operation. Although you can set this string using the
snmp-server host command by itself, we recommend that you define
this string using the snmp-server community command prior to using
the snmp-server host command. (Maximum length: 23 characters)
Default Setting
Host Address: None
Community String: public
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the
snmp-server enable server command to enable SNMP notifications.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#snmp-server host 1 10.1.19.23
batman
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server enable server (6-48)
snmp-server trap
This command enables the access point to send specific SNMP traps
(i.e., notifications). Use the no form to disable specific trap messages.
Syntax
snmp-server trap <trap>
no snmp-server trap <trap>
• trap - One of the following SNMP trap messages:
- dot11InterfaceAFail - The 802.11a or 802.11g interface has failed.
- dot11InterfaceGFail - The 802.11b/g interface has failed.
- dot11StationAssociation - A client station has successfully associated
with the access point.
- dot11StationAuthentication - A client station has been successfully
authenticated.
- dot11StationReAssociation - A client station has successfully
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
re-associated with the access point.
- dot11StationRequestFail - A client station has failed association,
re-association, or authentication.
- dot1xAuthFail - A 802.1X client station has failed RADIUS
authentication.
- dot1xAuthNotInitiated - A client station did not initiate 802.1X
authentication.
- dot1xAuthSuccess - A 802.1X client station has been successfully
authenticated by the RADIUS server.
- dot1xMacAddrAuthFail - A client station has failed MAC address
authentication with the RADIUS server.
- dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess - A client station has successfully
authenticated its MAC address with the RADIUS server.
- iappContextDataSent - A client station’s Context Data has been sent
to another access point with which the station has associated.
- iappStationRoamedFrom - A client station has roamed from another
access point (identified by its IP address).
- iappStationRoamedTo - A client station has roamed to another access
point (identified by its IP address).
- localMacAddrAuthFail - A client station has failed authentication with
the local MAC address database on the access point.
- localMacAddrAuthSuccess - A client station has successfully
authenticated its MAC address with the local database on the access
point.
- pppLogonFail - The access point has failed to log onto the PPPoE server
using the configured user name and password.
- sntpServerFail - The access point has failed to set the time from the
configured SNTP server.
- sysConfigFileVersionChanged - The access point’s configuration file
has been changed.
- sysRadiusServerChanged - The access point has changed from the
primary RADIUS server to the secondary, or from the secondary to the
primary.
- sysSystemDown - The access point is about to shutdown and reboot.
- sysSystemUp - The access point is up and running.
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Default Setting
All traps enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server host and
snmp-server enable server commands to enable SNMP notifications.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#no snmp-server trap
dot11StationAssociation
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#
snmp-server engine-id
This command is used for SNMP v3. It is used to uniquely identify the access point
among all access points in the network. Use the no form to delete the engine ID.
Syntax
snmp-server engine-id <engine-id>
no snmp-server engine-id
engine-id - Enter engine-id in hexadecimal (5-32 characters).
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• This command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server user command.
• Entering this command invalidates all engine IDs that have been previously
configured.
• If the engineID is deleted or changed, all SNMP users will be cleared. You
will need to reconfigure all existing users
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#snmp-server engine-id
1a:2b:3c:4d:00:ff
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#
snmp-server user
This command configures the SNMP v3 users that are allowed to manage the
access point. Use the no form to delete an SNMP v3 user.
Syntax
snmp-server user <user-name>
user-name - A user-defined string for the SNMP user. (32 characters
maximum)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Up to 10 SNMPv3 users can be configured on the access point.
• The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication/privacy digests
from the pass phrase. You should therefore configure the engine ID with
the snmp-server engine-id command before using this configuration
command.
• The access point enables SNMP v3 users to be assigned to three
pre-defined groups. Other groups cannot be defined. The available groups
are:
- RO - A read-only group using no authentication and no data encryption.
Users in this group use no security, either authentication or encryption,
in SNMP messages they send to the agent. This is the same as SNMP v1
or SNMP v2c.
- RWAuth - A read/write group using authentication, but no data
encryption. Users in this group send SNMP messages that use an MD5
key/password for authentication, but not a DES key/password for
encryption.
- RWPriv - A read/write group using authentication and data encryption.
Users in this group send SNMP messages that use an MD5 key/password
for authentication and a DES key/password for encryption. Both the
MD5 and DES key/passwords must be defined.
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
• The command prompts for the following information to configure an
SNMP v3 user:
- user-name - A user-defined string for the SNMP user. (32 characters
maximum)
- group-name - The name of the SNMP group to which the user is
assigned (32 characters maximum). There are three pre-defined groups:
RO, RWAuth, or RWPriv.
- auth-proto - The authentication type used for user authentication: md5
or none.
- auth-passphrase - The user password required when authentication is
used (8 – 32 characters).
- priv-proto - The encryption type used for SNMP data encryption: des or
none.
- priv-passphrase - The user password required when data encryption is
used (8 – 32 characters).
• Users must be assigned to groups that have the same security levels. If a
user who has “AuthPriv” security (uses authentication and encryption) is
assigned to a read-only (RO) group, the user will not be able to access the
database. An AuthPriv user must be assigned to the RWPriv group with the
AuthPriv security level.
• To configure a user for the RWAuth group, you must include the
auth-proto and auth-passphrase keywords.
• To configure a user for the RWPriv group, you must include the
auth-proto, auth-passphrase, priv-proto, and priv-passphrase keywords.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#snmp-server user
User Name<1-32> :chris
Group Name<1-32> :RWPriv
Authtype(md5,<cr>none):md5
Passphrase<8-32>:a good secret
Privacy(des,<cr>none) :des
Passphrase<8-32>:a very good secret
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#
snmp-server targets
This command configures SNMP v3 notification targets. Use the no form to
delete an SNMP v3 target.
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Syntax
snmp-server targets <target-id> <ip-addr> <sec-name>
[version {3}] [udp-port {port-number}] [notification-type
{TRAP}]
no snmp-server targets <target-id>
• target-id - A user-defined name that identifies a receiver of SNMP
notifications. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
• ip-addr - Specifies the IP address of the management station to receive
notifications.
• sec-name - The defined SNMP v3 user name that is to receive
notifications.
• version - The SNMP version of notifications. Currently only version 3 is
supported in this command.
• udp-port - The UDP port that is used on the receiving management
station for notifications.
• notification-type - The type of notification that is sent. Currently only
TRAP is supported.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The access point supports up to 10 SNMP v3 target IDs.
• The SNMP v3 user name that is specified in the target must first be
configured using the snmp-server user command.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#snmp-server targets mytraps
192.254.2.33 chris
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#
snmp-server filter
This command configures SNMP v3 notification filters. Use the no form to delete
an SNMP v3 filter or remove a subtree from a filter.
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Syntax
snmp-server filter <filter-id> <include | exclude> <subtree>
[mask {mask}]
no snmp-server filter <filter-id> [subtree]
• filter-id - A user-defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification
filter. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
• include - Defines a filter type that includes objects in the MIB subtree.
• exclude - Defines a filter type that excludes objects in the MIB subtree.
• subtree - The part of the MIB subtree that is to be filtered.
• mask - An optional hexadecimal value bit mask to define objects in the
MIB subtree.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The access point allows up to 10 notification filters to be created. Each
filter can be defined by up to 20 MIB subtree ID entries.
• Use the command more than once with the same filter ID to build a filter
that includes or excludes multiple MIB objects. Note that the filter entries
are applied in the sequence that they are defined.
• The MIB subtree must be defined in the form “.1.3.6.1” and always start
with a “.”.
• The mask is a hexadecimal value with each bit masking the corresponding
ID in the MIB subtree. A “1” in the mask indicates an exact match and a
“0” indicates a “wild card.” For example, a mask value of 0xFFBF provides
a bit mask “1111 1111 1011 1111.” If applied to the subtree
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23, the zero corresponds to the 10th subtree ID. When
there are more subtree IDs than bits in the mask, the mask is padded with
ones.
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#snmp-server filter trapfilter
include .1
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#snmp-server filter trapfilter
exclude .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23
snmp-server filter-assignments
This command assigns SNMP v3 notification filters to targets. Use the no form to
remove an SNMP v3 filter assignment.
Syntax
snmp-server filter-assignments <target-id> <filter-id>
no snmp-server filter-assignments <target-id>
• target-id - A user-defined name that identifies a receiver of SNMP
notifications. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
• filter-id - A user-defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification
filter. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#snmp-server filter-assignments
mytraps trapfilter
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#exit
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show snmp target
Host ID
User
: mytraps
: chris
IP Address
UDP Port
: 192.254.2.33
: 162
=============================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show snmp filter-assignments
HostID FilterID
mytraps trapfilter
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#
show snmp groups
This command displays the SNMP v3 pre-defined groups.
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Syntax
show snmp groups
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show snmp groups
GroupName
:RO
SecurityModel :USM
SecurityLevel :NoAuthNoPriv
GroupName
:RWAuth
SecurityModel :USM
SecurityLevel :AuthNoPriv
GroupName
:RWPriv
SecurityModel :USM
SecurityLevel :AuthPriv
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
show snmp users
This command displays the SNMP v3 users and settings.
Syntax
show snmp users
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show snmp users
=============================================
UserName
GroupName
AuthType
:chris
:RWPriv
:MD5
Passphrase:****************
PrivType
:DES
Passphrase:****************
=============================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
show snmp group-assignments
This command displays the SNMP v3 user group assignments.
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Syntax
show snmp group-assignments
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show snmp group-assignments
GroupName
UserName
:RWPriv
:chris
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
show snmp target
This command displays the SNMP v3 notification target settings.
Syntax
show snmp target
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show snmp target
Host ID
User
: mytraps
: chris
IP Address
UDP Port
: 192.254.2.33
: 162
=============================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
show snmp filter
This command displays the SNMP v3 notification filter settings.
Syntax
show snmp filter [filter-id]
• filter-id - A user-defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification
filter. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
6-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show snmp filter
Filter: trapfilter
Type: include
Subtree: iso.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1
Type: exclude
Subtree: iso.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23
=============================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
show snmp filter-assignments
This command displays the SNMP v3 notification filter assignments.
Syntax
show snmp filter-assignments
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show snmp filter-assignments
HostID FilterID
mytraps trapfilter
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
show snmp
This command displays the SNMP configuration settings.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show snmp
SNMP Information
==============================================
Service State
Community (ro)
Community (rw)
Location
: Enable
: *****
: *****
: WC-19
: Paul
Contact
EngineId
:80:00:07:e5:80:00:00:2e:62:00:00:00:18
EngineBoots:1
Trap Destinations:
1:
2:
3:
4:
192.254.2.9, Community: *****, State: Enabled
0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled
0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled
0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled
dot11InterfaceAGFail Enabled
dot11InterfaceBFail Enabled
dot11StationAssociation Enabled dot11StationAuthentication
Enabled
dot11StationReAssociation Enabled
Enabled
dot11StationRequestFail
dot1xAuthFail Enabled
dot1xAuthSuccess Enabled
dot1xAuthNotInitiated Enabled
dot1xMacAddrAuthFail Enabled
dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess Enabled
Enabled
iappContextDataSent
iappStationRoamedFrom Enabled
Enabled
iappStationRoamedTo
localMacAddrAuthFail Enabled
pppLogonFail Enabled
configFileVersionChanged Enabled
Enabled
localMacAddrAuthSuccess Enabled
sntpServerFail Enabled
radiusServerChanged
systemDown Enabled
systemUp Enabled
=============================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Flash/File Commands
These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files.
Table 17 Flash/File Commands
Command
bootfile
copy
Function
Mode
Page
6-61
6-62
Specifies the file or image used to start up the system GC
Copies a code image or configuration between flash
memory and a FTP/TFTP server
Exec
delete
Deletes a file or code image
Exec
Exec
Exec
6-63
6-64
6-65
dir
Displays a list of files in flash memory
show bootfile
Displays the name of the current operation code file
that
booted the system
bootfile
This command specifies the image used to start up the system.
Syntax
bootfile <filename>
filename - Name of the image file.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
• The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the
file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file
names is 32 characters. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
• If the file contains an error, it cannot be set as the default file.
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #bootfile -img.bin
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
copy
This command copies a boot file, code image, or configuration file between the
access point’s flash memory and a FTP/TFTP server. When you save the
configuration settings to a file on a FTP/TFTP server, that file can later be
downloaded to the access point to restore system operation. The success of the
file transfer depends on the accessibility of the FTP/TFTP server and the quality of
the network connection.
Syntax
copy <ftp | tftp> file
copy config <ftp | tftp>
• ftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from an FTP server.
• tftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a TFTP server.
• file - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a flash memory file.
• config - Keyword that allows you to upload the configuration file from
flash memory.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
• The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command.
• Only a configuration file can be uploaded to an FTP/TFTP server, but every
type of file can be downloaded to the access point.
•
The destination file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading
letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length
for file names on the FTP/TFTP server is 255 characters or 32 characters for
files on the access point. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
• Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the access point supports only
two operation code files.
• The system configuration file must be named “syscfg” in all copy
commands.
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Example
The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file
on the TFTP server:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #copy config tftp
TFTP Source file name:syscfg
TFTP Server IP:192.254.2.19
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
The following example shows how to download a configuration file:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #copy tftp file
1. Application image
2. Config file
3. Boot block image
Select the type of download<1,2,3>: [1]:2
TFTP Source file name:syscfg
TFTP Server IP:192.254.2.19
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
delete
This command deletes a file or image.
Syntax
delete <filename>
filename - Name of the configuration file or image name.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
NOTE: Beware of deleting application images from flash memory. At least one
application image is required in order to boot the access point. If there are
multiple image files in flash memory, and the one used to boot the access point is
deleted, be sure you first use the bootfile command to update the application
image file booted at startup before you reboot the access point.
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
This example shows how to delete the test.cfg configuration file from flash
memory.
Are you sure you wish to delete this file? <y/n>:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
Related Commands
bootfile (6-61)
dir (6-64)
dir
This command displays a list of files in flash memory.
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
File information is shown below:
Column Heading
File Name
Type
Description
The name of the file.
(2) Operation Code and (5) Configuration file
The length of the file in bytes.
File Size
Example
The following example shows how to display all file information:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #dir
File Name
Type
File Size
--------------------------
dflt-img.bin
syscfg
syscfg_bak
zz-img.bin
---- -----------
2
5
5
2
1044140
16860
16860
1044140
1048576 byte(s) available
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
show bootfile
This command displays the name of the current operation code file that booted
the system.
Syntax
show snmp filter-assignments
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show bootfile
Bootfile Information
===================================
Bootfile : ec-img.bin
===================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
RADIUS Client
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is a logon authentication
protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access for
RADIUS-aware devices to the network. An authentication server contains a
database of credentials, such as users names and passwords, for each wireless
client that requires access to the access point.
Table 18 RADIUS Client
Command
Function
Mode
GC
Page
6-66
6-66
6-67
6-67
6-68
radius-server address
radius-server port
radius-server key
Specifies the RADIUS server
Sets the RADIUS server network port
Sets the RADIUS encryption key
Sets the number of retries
GC
GC
radius-server retransmit
radius-server timeout
GC
Sets the interval between sending authentication
requests
GC
radius-server
Sets the RADIUS Accounting server network port
GC
GC
6-68
6-69
6-69
port-accounting
radius-server
timeout-interim
Sets the interval between transmitting accounting
updates to the RADIUS server
radius-server
radius-mac-format
Sets the format for specifying MAC addresses on the GC
RADIUS server
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command
Function
Mode
GC
Page
6-70
radius-server vlan-format
Sets the format for specifying VLAN IDs on the
RADIUS server
show radius
Shows the current RADIUS settings
Exec
6-70
radius-server address
This command specifies the primary and secondary RADIUS servers.
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] address <host_ip_address | host_name>
• secondary - Secondary server.
• host_ip_address - IP address of server.
• host_name - Host name of server. (Range: 1-20 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#radius-server address
192.254.2.25
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
radius-server port
This command sets the RADIUS server network port.
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] port <port_number>
• secondary - Secondary server.
• port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages.
(Range: 1024-65535)
Default Setting
1812
Command Mode
Global Configuration
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#radius-server port 181
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
radius-server key
This command sets the RADIUS encryption key.
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] key <key_string>
• secondary - Secondary server.
• key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client.
Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)
Default Setting
DEFAULT
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#radius-server key green
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
radius-server retransmit
This command sets the number of retries.
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] retransmit number_of_retries
• secondary - Secondary server.
• number_of_retries - Number of times the access point will try to
authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1 - 30)
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
3
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#radius-server retransmit 5
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
radius-server timeout
This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to
the RADIUS server.
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] timeout number_of_seconds
• secondary - Secondary server.
• number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the access point waits for a
reply before resending a request. (Range: 1-60)
Default Setting
5
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#radius-server timeout 10
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
radius-server port-accounting
This command sets the RADIUS Accounting server network port.
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] port-accounting <port_number>
• secondary - Secondary server. If secondary is not specified, then the
access point assumes you are configuring the primary RADIUS server.
• port_number - RADIUS Accounting server UDP port used for accounting
messages.
(Range: 0 or 1024-65535)
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Default Setting
0 (disabled)
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• When the RADIUS Accounting server UDP port is specified, a RADIUS
accounting session is automatically started for each user that is
successfully authenticated to the access point.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#radius-server port-accounting 1813
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
radius-server timeout-interim
This command sets the interval between transmitting accounting updates to the
RADIUS server.
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] timeout-interim <number_of_seconds>
• secondary - Secondary server.
• number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the access point waits between
transmitting accounting updates. (Range: 60-86400)
Default Setting
3600
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The access point sends periodic accounting updates after every interim
period until the user logs off and a “stop” message is sent.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#radius-server timeout-interim 500
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
radius-server radius-mac-format
This command sets the format for specifying MAC addresses on the RADIUS
server.
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Syntax
radius-server radius-mac-format <multi-colon | multi-dash |
no-delimiter | single-dash>
• multi-colon - Enter MAC addresses in the form xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.
• multi-dash - Enter MAC addresses in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.
• no-delimiter - Enter MAC addresses in the form xxxxxxxxxxxx.
• single-dash - Enter MAC addresses in the form xxxxxx-xxxxxx.
Default Setting
No delimiter
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#radius-server radius-mac-format
multi-dash
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
radius-server vlan-format
This command sets the format for specifying VLAN IDs on the RADIUS server.
Syntax
radius-server vlan-format <hex | ascii>
• hex - Enter VLAN IDs as a hexadecimal number.
• ascii - Enter VLAN IDs as an ASCII string.
Default Setting
Hex
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#radius-server vlan-format ascii
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
show radius
This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server.
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show radius
Radius Server Information
========================================
IP
Port
Key
Retransmit
Timeout
: 0.0.0.0
: 1812
: *****
: 3
: 5
Radius MAC format : no-delimiter
Radius VLAN format : HEX
========================================
Radius Secondary Server Information
========================================
IP
Port
Key
Retransmit
Timeout
: 0.0.0.0
: 1812
: *****
: 3
: 5
Radius MAC format : no-delimiter
Radius VLAN format : HEX
========================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
802.1X Authentication
The access point supports IEEE 802.1X access control for wireless clients. This
control feature prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring an
802.1X client application to submit user credentials for authentication. Client
authentication is then verified by a RADIUS server using EAP (Extensible
Authentication Protocol) before the access point grants client access to the
network. The 802.1X EAP packets are also used to pass dynamic unicast session
keys and static broadcast keys to wireless clients.
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Table 19 802.1X Authentication
Command
802.1x
Function
Mode
Page
Configures 802.1X as disabled, supported, or required IC-W-VAP 6-72
802.1x broadcast-key-
refresh-rate
Sets the interval at which the primary broadcast keys
are refreshed for stations using 802.1X dynamic keying
IC-W-VAP 6-74
IC-W-VAP 6-75
802.1x session-key-
refresh-rate
Sets the interval at which unicast session keys are
refreshed for associated stations using dynamic keying
802.1x session-timeout
Sets the timeout after which a connected client must be IC-W-VAP 6-75
re-authenticated
802.1x-supplicant enable Enables the access point to operate as a 802.1X
supplicant
GC
6-76
6-76
6-76
802.1x-supplicant user
Sets the supplicant user name and password for the
access point
GC
show authentication
Shows all 802.1X authentication settings, as well as the Exec
address filter table
802.1x
This command configures 802.1X as optionally supported or as required for
wireless clients. Use the no form to disable 802.1X support.
Syntax
802.1x <supported | required>
no 802.1x
• supported - Authenticates clients that initiate the 802.1X authentication
process. Uses standard 802.11 authentication for all others.
• required - Requires 802.1X authentication for all clients.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• When 802.1X is disabled, the access point does not support 802.1X
authentication for any station. After successful 802.11 association, each
client is allowed to access the network.
• When 802.1X is supported, the access point supports 802.1X
authentication only for clients initiating the 802.1X authentication process
(i.e., the access point does NOT initiate 802.1X authentication). For
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
stations initiating 802.1X, only those stations successfully authenticated
are allowed to access the network. For those stations not initiating
802.1X, access to the network is allowed after successful 802.11
association.
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
• When 802.1X is required, the access point enforces 802.1X authentication
for all 802.11 associated stations. If 802.1X authentication is not initiated
by the station, the access point will initiate authentication. Only those
stations successfully authenticated with 802.1X are allowed to access the
network.
• 802.1X does not apply to the 10/100Base-TX port.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#802.1x supported
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
802.1x broadcast-key-refresh-rate
This command sets the interval at which the broadcast keys are refreshed for
stations using 802.1X dynamic keying.
Syntax
802.1x broadcast-key-refresh-rate <rate>
rate - The interval at which the access point rotates broadcast keys.
(Range: 0 - 1440 minutes)
Default Setting
0 (Disabled)
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The access point uses Outdoor 11a Building to Building OL (Extensible
Authentication Protocol Over LANs) packets to pass dynamic unicast
session and broadcast keys to wireless clients. The 802.1x
broadcast-key-refresh-rate command specifies the interval after which
the broadcast keys are changed. The 802.1x session-key-refresh-rate
command specifies the interval after which unicast session keys are
changed.
• Dynamic broadcast key rotation allows the access point to generate a
random group key and periodically update all key-management capable
wireless clients.
6-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#802.1X broadcast-key-refresh-rate
5
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
802.1x session-key-refresh-rate
This command sets the interval at which unicast session keys are refreshed for
associated stations using dynamic keying.
Syntax
802.1x session-key-refresh-rate <rate>
rate - The interval at which the access point refreshes a session key.
(Range: 0 - 1440 minutes)
Default Setting
0 (Disabled)
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
Session keys are unique to each client, and are used to authenticate a client
connection, and correlate traffic passing between a specific client and the
access point.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#802.1x session-key-refresh-rate 5
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
802.1x session-timeout
This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be
re-authenticated. Use the no form to disable 802.1X re-authentication.
Syntax
802.1x session-timeout <seconds>
no 802.1x session-timeout
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 0-65535)
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default
0 (Disabled)
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#802.1x session-timeout 300
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
802.1x-supplicant enable
This command enables the access point to operate as an 802.1X supplicant for
authentication. Use the no form to disable 802.1X authentication of the access
point.
Syntax
802.1x-supplicant enable
no 802.1x-supplicant
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
A user name and password must be configured first before the 802.1X
supplicant feature can be enabled.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#802.1x-supplicant enable
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#
802.1x-supplicant user
This command sets the user name and password used for authentication of the
access point when operating as a 802.1X supplicant. Use the no form to clear the
supplicant user name and password.
6-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Syntax
802.1x-supplicant user <username> <password>
no 802.1x-supplicant user
• username - The access point name used for authentication to the network.
(Range: 1-32 alphanumeric characters)
• password - The MD5 password used for access point authentication.
(Range: 1-32 alphanumeric characters)
Default
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The access point currently only supports EAP-MD5 CHAP for 802.1X
supplicant authentication.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#802.1x-supplicant user AP8760
dot1xpass
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#
show authentication
This command shows all 802.1X authentication settings, as well as the address
filter table.
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show authentication
Authentication Information
===========================================================
MAC Authentication Server
: DISABLED
MAC Auth Session Timeout Value : 0 min
802.1x supplicant
: DISABLED
802.1x supplicant user
802.1x supplicant password
Address Filtering
: EMPTY
: EMPTY
: ALLOWED
System Default : ALLOW addresses not found in filter table.
Filter Table
MAC Address
Status
-----------------
00-70-50-cc-99-1a
00-70-50-cc-99-1b
----------
DENIED
ALLOWED
=========================================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
MAC Address Authentication
Use these commands to define MAC authentication on the access point. For local
MAC authentication, first define the default filtering policy using the address filter
default command. Then enter the MAC addresses to be filtered, indicating if they
are allowed or denied. For RADIUS MAC authentication, the MAC addresses and
filtering policy must be configured on the RADIUS server.
Table 20 MAC Address Authentication
Command
Function
Mode
GC
Page
6-79
6-79
6-81
6-81
address filter default
address filter entry
address filter delete
Sets filtering to allow or deny listed addresses
Enters a MAC address in the filter table
Removes a MAC address from the filter table
GC
GC
mac- authentication server Sets address filtering to be performed with local or
remote options
GC
6-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Command
Function
Mode
GC
Page
6-82
mac- authentication
session-timeout
Sets the interval at which associated clients will be
re-authenticated with the RADIUS server authentication
database
show authentication
Shows all 802.1X authentication settings, as well as the Exec
address filter table
6-76
address filter default
This command sets filtering to allow or deny listed MAC addresses.
Syntax
address filter default <allowed | denied>
• allowed - Only MAC addresses entered as “denied” in the address
filtering table are denied.
• denied - Only MAC addresses entered as “allowed” in the address
filtering table are allowed.
Default
allowed
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#address filter default denied
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
address filter entry (6-79)
802.1x-supplicant user (6-76)
address filter entry
This command enters a MAC address in the filter table.
Syntax
address filter entry <mac-address> <allowed | denied>
• mac-address - Physical address of client. (Enter six pairs of hexadecimal
digits separated by hyphens; e.g., 00-90-D1-12-AB-89.)
• allowed - Entry is allowed access.
• denied - Entry is denied access.
6-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Mode
• The access point supports up to 1024 MAC addresses.
• An entry in the address table may be allowed or denied access depending
on the global setting configured for the address entry default
command.
Example
00-70-50-cc-99-1a allowed
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
address filter default (6-79)
802.1x-supplicant user (6-76)
6-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
address filter delete
This command deletes a MAC address from the filter table.
Syntax
address filter delete <mac-address>
mac-address - Physical address of client. (Enter six pairs of hexadecimal
digits separated by hyphens.)
Default
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#address filter delete
00-70-50-cc-99-1b
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
802.1x-supplicant user (6-76)
mac-authentication server
This command sets address filtering to be performed with local or remote
options. Use the no form to disable MAC address authentication.
Syntax
mac-authentication server [local | remote]
• local - Authenticate the MAC address of wireless clients with the local
authentication database during 802.11 association.
• remote - Authenticate the MAC address of wireless clients with the
RADIUS server during 802.1X authentication.
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
address filter entry (6-79)
radius-server address (6-66)
802.1x-supplicant user (6-76)
mac-authentication session-timeout
This command sets the interval at which associated clients will be
re-authenticated with the RADIUS server authentication database. Use the no
form to disable reauthentication.
Syntax
mac-authentication session-timeout <minutes>
minutes - Re-authentication interval. (Range: 0-1440)
Default
0 (disabled)
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#mac-authentication
session-timeout 1
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Filtering Commands
The commands described in this section are used to filter communications
between wireless clients, control access to the management interface from
wireless clients, and filter traffic using specific Ethernet protocol types.
6-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Table 21 Filtering Commands
Command
Function
Mode
GC
Page
6-83
6-85
filter local-bridge
filter ap-manage
Disables communication between wireless clients
Prevents wireless clients from accessing the
management interface
GC
filter uplink enable
filter uplink
Ethernet port MAC address filtering
GC
6-85
6-85
6-86
Adds or deletes a MAC address from the filtering table GC
filter ethernet-type enable Checks the Ethernet type for all incoming and outgoing GC
Ethernet packets against the protocol filtering table
filter ethernet-type
protocol
Sets a filter for a specific Ethernet type
GC
6-87
6-87
show filters
Shows the filter configuration
Exec
filter local-bridge
This command disables communication between wireless clients. Use the no form
to disable this filtering.
Syntax
filter local-bridge <all-VAP | intra-VAP>
no filter local-bridge
all-VAP - When enabled, clients cannot establish wireless communications
with any other client, either those associated to the same VAP interface or
any other VAP interface.
intra-VAP - When enabled, clients associated with a specific VAP
interface cannot establish wireless communications with each other.
Clients can communicate with clients associated to other VAP interfaces.
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command can disable wireless-to-wireless communications between
clients via the access point. However, it does not affect communications
between wireless clients and the wired network.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#filter local-bridge
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
6-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
filter ap-manage
This command prevents wireless clients from accessing the management interface
on the access point. Use the no form to disable this filtering.
Syntax
[no] filter ap-manage
Default
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#filter AP-manage
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
filter uplink enable
This command enables filtering of MAC addresses from the Ethernet port.
Syntax
[no] filter uplink enable
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#filter uplink enable
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
filter uplink
This command adds or deletes MAC addresses from the uplink filtering table.
Syntax
filter uplink <add | delete> MAC address
MAC address - Specifies a MAC address in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.
A maximum of eight addresses can be added to the filtering table.
6-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#filter uplink add
00-12-34-56-78-9a
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
filter ethernet-type enable
This command checks the Ethernet type on all incoming and outgoing Ethernet
packets against the protocol filtering table. Use the no form to disable this
feature.
Syntax
[no] filter ethernet-type enable
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command is used in conjunction with the filter ethernet-type
protocol command to determine which Ethernet protocol types are to be
filtered.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#filter ethernet-type enable
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
filter ethernet-type protocol (6-87)
6-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
filter ethernet-type protocol
This command sets a filter for a specific Ethernet type. Use the no form to disable
filtering for a specific Ethernet type.
Syntax
filter ethernet-type protocol <protocol>
no filter ethernet-type protocol <protocol>
protocol - An Ethernet protocol type. (Options: ARP, RARP,
Berkeley-Trailer-Negotiation, LAN-Test, X25-Level-3, Banyan, CDP, DEC
XNS, DEC-MOP-Dump-Load, DEC-MOP, DEC-LAT, Ethertalk,
Appletalk-ARP, Novell-IPX(old), Novell-IPX(new), EAPOL, Telxon-TXP,
Aironet-DDP, Enet-Config-Test, IP, IPv6, NetBEUI, PPPoE_Discovery,
PPPoE_PPP_Session)
Default
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
Use the filter ethernet-type enable command to enable filtering for
Ethernet types specified in the filtering table, or the no filter ethernet-type
enable command to disable all filtering based on the filtering table.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#filter ethernet-type protocol ARP
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
filter ethernet-type enable (6-86)
show filters
This command shows the filter options and protocol entries in the filter table.
Command Mode
Exec
6-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show filters
Protocol Filter Information
=======================================================================
Local Bridge
AP Management
:Traffic among all client STAs blocked
:ENABLED
Ethernet Type Filter :DISABLED
UPlink Access Table
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
UPlink access control:Enabled
UPlink MAC access control list
00-12-34-56-78-9a
:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Enabled Protocol Filters
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
No protocol filters are enabled
=======================================================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
WDS Bridge Commands
The commands described in this section are used to set the operation mode for
each access point interface and configure WIreless Distribution System (WDS)
forwarding table settings.
Table 22 WDS Bridge Commands
Command
bridge mode
bridge role
Function
Mode
IC-W
Page
6-89
6-89
6-90
Selects Master or Slave mode.
Selects the bridge operation mode for a radio interface IC-W
bridge channel-auto-sync Automatically finds the parent bridge operating
channel
IC-W
CAUTION: Do not enable Channel Auto Sync on a master
bridge if there is no root bridge acting as the master
bridge's parent.
!
bridge-link parent
Configures the MAC addresses of the parent bridge IC-W
node
6-90
6-91
6-92
bridge-link child
Configures MAC addresses of connected child bridge IC-W
nodes
bridge dynamic-entry
age-time
Sets the aging time for dynamic entries in the WDS
forwarding table
GC
show bridge aging-time
show bridge filter-entry
Displays the current WDS forwarding table aging time Exec
6-94
6-95
Displays current entries in the bridge MAC address
table
Exec
show bridge link
Displays current bridge settings for specified interfaces Exec
6-97
6-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
bridge mode
This command selects between Master and Slave mode.
Syntax
bridge mode <master | slave>
• master - Operates as a master enabling up to five slave links.
• slave - Operates as a slave with only one link to the master.
Default Setting
Master
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#bridge mode master
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#
bridge role (WDS)
This command selects the bridge operation mode for the radio interface.
Syntax
bridge role <ap | repeater | bridge | root-bridge >
• ap - Operates only as an access point for wireless clients.
• repeater - Operates as a wireless repeater, extending the range for
remote wireless clients and connecting them to the root bridge. The
“Parent” link to the root bridge must be configured. In this mode, traffic
is not forwarded to the Ethernet port from the radio interface.
• bridge - Operates as a bridge to other access points also in bridge mode.
• root-bridge - Operates as the root bridge in the wireless bridge network.
Default Setting
AP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• When the bridge role is set to “repeater,” the “Parent” link to the root
bridge must be configured (see “bridge channel-auto-sync” on page 90).
6-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
When the access point is operating in this mode, traffic is not forwarded
to the Ethernet port from the radio interface.
• Up to four WDS bridge links (MAC addresses) per radio interface can be
specified for each unit in the wireless bridge network. One unit only must
be configured as the “root bridge” in the wireless network. The root
bridge is the unit connected to the main core of the wired LAN. Other
bridges need to specify one “Parent” link to the root bridge or to a bridge
connected to the root bridge. The other seven WDS links are available as
“Child” links to other bridges.
• The bridge link on the radio interface always uses the default VAP
interface. In any bridge mode, VAP interfaces 1 to 7 are not available for
use.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#bridge role root-bridge
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#
bridge channel-auto-sync
CAUTION: Do not enable Channel Auto Sync on a master bridge if there is no
root bridge acting as the master bridge's parent.
!
This command allows a child bridge to automatically find the operating channel
of its parent bridge.
Syntax
bridge channel-auto-sync <enable | disable>
• enable - The bridge will automatically search and find the operating
channel of its parent.
• disable - The bridge must have the operating channel manually set to the
operating channel of its parent bridge.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#bridge channel-auto-sync enable
Enable channel auto sync!!
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#
6-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
bridge-link parent
This command configures the MAC address of the parent bridge node.
Syntax
bridge-link parent <mac-address>
mac-address - The wireless MAC address of the parent bridge unit.
(12 hexadecimal digits in the form “xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx”).
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
Every bridge (except the root bridge) in the wireless bridge network must
specify the MAC address of the parent bridge that is linked to the root
bridge, or the root bridge itself.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#bridge-link parent
00-08-2d-69-3a-51
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#
bridge-link child
This command configures the MAC addresses of child bridge nodes.
Syntax
bridge-link child <index> <mac-address>
• index - The link index number of the child node. (Range: 1 - 6)
• mac-address - The wireless MAC address of a child bridge unit.
(12 hexadecimal digits in the form “xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx”).
6-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• In root bridge mode, up to six child bridge links can be specified using link
index numbers 1 to 6.
• In bridge mode, up to five child links can be specified using link index
numbers 2 to 6. Index number 1 is reserved for the parent link, which must
be set using the bridge parent command.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#bridge-link child 2
00-08-3e-84-bc-6d
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#bridge-link child 3
00-08-3e-85-13-f2
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#bridge-link child 4
00-08-3e-84-79-31
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#
bridge dynamic-entry age-time
This command sets the time for aging out dynamic entries in the WDS forwarding
table.
Syntax
bridge dynamic-entry age-time <seconds>
seconds - The time to age out an address entry. (Range: 10-10000
seconds).
6-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Default Setting
300 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
If the MAC address of an entry in the address table is not seen on the
associated interface for longer than the aging time, the entry is discarded.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#bridge dynamic-entry age-time 100
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#
6-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show bridge aging-time
Aging time: 300
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
show bridge filter-entry
This command displays current entries in the WDS forwarding table.
Command Mode
Exec
6-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show bridge filter-entry
max entry numbers =512
current entry nums =13
****************************************************************
*********************** Bridge MAC Addr Table ***********
****************************************************************
|
MAC
| Port |Fwd_type| VlanID|origin life|remain Life| Type
|
01 80 c2 00 00 00
Static
01 80 c2 00 00 03
Static
00 30 f1 f0 9b 20
Static
00 30 f1 f0 9b 21
Static
00 30 f1 f0 9b 22
Static
00 30 f1 f0 9b 23
Static
00 30 f1 f0 9b 24
Static
00 30 f1 f0 9b 25
Static
00 30 f1 f0 9b 26
Static
00 30 f1 f0 9b 27
Static
00 30 f1 2f be 30
Dynamic
00 30 f1 f0 9a 9c
Static
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
5
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
4
4095
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
175
300
300
4095
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
ff ff ff ff ff ff
Static
4095
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
6-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
show bridge link
This command displays WDS bridge link and spanning tree settings for specified
interfaces.
Syntax
show bridge link <ethernet | wireless <a | g> [index]>
• ethernet - Specifies the Ethernet interface.
• wireless - Specifies a wireless interface.
- a - The 802.11a radio interface.
- g - The 802.11g radio interface.
- index - The index number of a bridge link. (Range: 1 - 6)
6-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show bridge link wireless a
Interface Wireless A WDS Information
====================================
AP Role:
Parent:
Child:
Bridge
00-12-34-56-78-9a
Child 2:
00-08-12-34-56-de
00-00-00-00-00-00
00-00-00-00-00-00
00-00-00-00-00-00
00-00-00-00-00-00
Child 3:
Child 4:
Child 5:
Child 6:
STAs:
No WDS Stations.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show bridge link wireless a 2
Port-No
: 11
status
: Enabled
state
: Disabled
priority
: 0
path cost
: 19
message age Timer
message age
designated-root
designated-cost
: Inactive
: 4469
: priority = 32768, MAC = 00:30:F1:F0:9A:9C
: 0
designated-bridge : priority = 32768, MAC = 00:30:F1:F0:9A:9C
designated-port : priority = 0, port No = 11
forward-transitions : 0
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
6-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show bridge link ethernet
status
state
priority
: Enabled
: Forwarding
: 0
path cost
: 19
message age Timer
message age
designated-root
designated-cost
: Inactive
: 4346
: priority = 32768, MAC = 00:30:F1:F0:9A:9C
: 0
designated-bridge : priority = 32768, MAC = 00:30:F1:F0:9A:9C
designated-port : priority = 0, port No = 1
forward-transitions : 1
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
Spanning Tree Commands
The commands described in this section are used to set the MAC address table
aging time and spanning tree parameters for both the Ethernet and wireless
interfaces.
Table 23 Bridge Commands
Command
Function
Mode
GC
Page
bridge stp enable
bridge stp forwarding-delay
bridge stp hello-time
bridge stp max-age
bridge stp priority
bridge-link path-cost
bridge-link port-priority
show bridge stp
Enables the Spanning Tree feature
Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time
Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time
6-99
GC
6-100
6-101
6-101
6-102
6-103
6-104
6-104
6-97
GC
Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age GC
Configures the spanning tree bridge priority
Configures the spanning tree path cost of a port
Configures the spanning tree priority of a port
Displays the global spanning tree settings
GC
IC
IC
Exec
show bridge link
Displays current bridge settings for specified interfaces Exec
bridge stp enable
This command enables the Spanning Tree Protocol. Use the no form to disable
the Spanning Tree Protocol.
6-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Syntax
[no] bridge stp enable
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
This example globally enables the Spanning Tree Protocol.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)bridge stp enable
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)
bridge stp forwarding-delay
Use this command to configure the spanning tree bridge forward time globally
for the wireless bridge. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
bridge stp forwarding-delay <seconds>
no bridge stp forwarding-delay
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 4 - 30 seconds)
The minimum value is the higher of 4 or [(max-age / 2) + 1].
Default Setting
15 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait
before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay
is required because every device must receive information about topology
6-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time
to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the
discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#bridge stp forwarding-delay 20
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#
bridge stp hello-time
Use this command to configure the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for
the wireless bridge. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
bridge stp hello-time <time>
no bridge stp hello-time
time - Time in seconds. (Range: 1-10 seconds).
The maximum value is the lower of 10 or [(max-age / 2) -1].
Default Setting
2 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the time interval (in seconds) at which the root device
transmits a configuration message.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#bridge stp hello-time 5
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#
bridge stp max-age
Use this command to configure the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally
for the wireless bridge. Use the no form to restore the default.
6-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Syntax
bridge stp max-age <seconds>
no bridge stp max-age
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 6-40 seconds)
The minimum value is the higher of 6 or [2 x (hello-time + 1)].
The maximum value is the lower of 40 or [2 x (forward-time - 1)].
Default Setting
20 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait
without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure.
All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration
messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information
(provided in the last configuration message) becomes the designated port
for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from
among the device ports attached to the network.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#bridge stp max-age 40
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#
bridge stp priority
Use this command to configure the spanning tree priority globally for the wireless
bridge. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
bridge stp priority<priority>
no bridge stp priority
priority - Priority of the bridge. (Range: 0 - 65535)
6-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Default Setting
32768
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated
port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STP root device.
However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest
MAC address will then become the root device.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#bridge stp-bridge priority 40000
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(config)#
bridge-link path-cost
Use this command to configure the spanning tree path cost for the specified port.
Syntax
bridge-link path-cost <index> <cost>
• index - Specifies the bridge link number on the wireless bridge. (Range:
1-6 required on wireless interface only)
• cost - The path cost for the port. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
19
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
• This command is used by the Spanning Tree Protocol to determine the best
path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports
attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower
media.
• Path cost takes precedence over port priority.
6-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#bridge-link path-cost 1 50
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#
bridge-link port-priority
Use this command to configure the priority for the specified port.
Syntax
bridge-link port-priority <index> <priority>
• index - Specifies the bridge link number on the wireless bridge. (Range:
1-6 required on wireless interface only)
• priority - The priority for a port. (Range: 1-255)
Default Setting
128
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
• This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree
Protocol. If the path cost for all ports on a wireless bridge are the same, the
port with the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an
active link in the spanning tree.
• Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with
lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#bridge-link port-priority 1
64
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#
Related Commands
bridge-link path-cost (6-103)
show bridge stp
This command displays aging time and spanning tree settings for the Ethernet
and wireless interfaces.
6-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Syntax
show bridge stp
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#show bridge stp
Bridge MAC
Status
priority
: 00:12:CF:05:B7:84
: Disabled
: 0
designated-root
root-path-cost
root-Port-no
Hold Time
: priority = 0, MAC = 00:00:00:00:00:00
: 0
: 0
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 Seconds
2 Seconds
20 Seconds
15 Seconds
2 Seconds
20 Seconds
15 Seconds
Hello Time
Maximum Age
Forward Delay
bridge Hello Time
bridge Maximum Age
bridge Forward Delay :
time-since-top-change: 89185 Seconds
topology-change-count: 0
Outdoor 11a Building to Building#
Ethernet Interface Commands
The commands described in this section configure connection parameters for the
Ethernet port and wireless interface.
Table 24 Ehternet Interface Commands
Command
Function
Mode
GC
Page
interface ethernet
dns primary- server
dns secondary- server
ip address
Enters Ethernet interface configuration mode
Specifies the primary name server
Specifies the secondary name server
Sets the IP address for the Ethernet interface
Submits a DHCP request for an IP address
6-106
6-106
6-106
6-107
6-108
6-109
IC-E
IC-E
IC-E
IC-E
IC-E
ip dhcp
speed-duplex
Configures speed and duplex operation on the
Ethernet interface
shutdown
Disables the Ethernet interface
IC-E
Exec
6-109
6-110
show interface ethernet
Shows the status for the Ethernet interface
6-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
interface ethernet
This command enters Ethernet interface configuration mode.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
To specify the 10/100Base-TX network interface, enter the following command:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#interface ethernet
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#
dns server
This command specifies the address for the primary or secondary domain name
server to be used for name-to-address resolution.
Syntax
dns primary-server <server-address>
dns secondary-server <server-address>
• primary-server - Primary server used for name resolution.
• secondary-server - Secondary server used for name resolution.
• server-address - IP address of domain-name server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The primary and secondary name servers are queried in sequence.
Example
This example specifies two domain-name servers.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#dns primary-server
192.254.2.55
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#dns secondary-server
10.1.0.55
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#
6-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Related Commands
show interface ethernet (6-110)
ip address
This command sets the IP address for the access point. Use the no form to restore
the default IP address.
Syntax
ip address <ip-address> <netmask> <gateway>
no ip address
• ip-address - IP address
• netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies
the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.
• gateway - IP address of the default gateway
Default Setting
IP address: 192.254.2.1
Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• DHCP is enabled by default. To manually configure a new IP address, you
must first disable the DHCP client with the no ip dhcp command.
• You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access
over the network or to connect the access point to existing IP subnets. You
can manually configure a specific IP address using this command, or direct
the device to obtain an address from a DHCP server using the ip dhcp
command. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated
by periods. Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the
configuration program.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#interface ethernet
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#ip address 192.254.2.1
255.255.255.0 192.254.2.253
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#
Related Commands
ip dhcp (6-108)
6-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
ip dhcp
This command enables the access point to obtain an IP address from a DHCP
server. Use the no form to restore the default IP address.
Syntax
[no] ip dhcp
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access
over the network or to connect the access point to existing IP subnets. You
can manually configure a specific IP address using the ip address
command, or direct the device to obtain an address from a DHCP server
using this command.
• When you use this command, the access point will begin broadcasting
DHCP client requests. The current IP address (i.e., default or manually
configured address) will continue to be effective until a DHCP reply is
received. Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort
to learn its IP address. (DHCP values can include the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway.)
Example
Enter Ethernet configuration commands, one per line.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#ip dhcp
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#
Related Commands
ip address (6-107)
6-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
speed-duplex
This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when
autonegotiation is disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
speed-duplex <auto | 10MH | 10MF | 100MF | 100MH>
• auto - autonegotiate speed and duplex mode
• 10MH - Forces 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation
• 10MF - Forces 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation
• 100MH - Forces 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation
• 100MF - Forces 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation
Default Setting
Auto-negotiation is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
If autonegotiation is disabled, the speed and duplex mode must be
configured to match the setting of the attached device.
Example
The following example configures the Ethernet port to 100 Mbps, full-duplex
operation.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-ethernet)#speed-duplex 100mf
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-ethernet)#
shutdown
This command disables the Ethernet interface. To restart a disabled interface, use
the no form.
Syntax
[no] shutdown
Default Setting
Interface enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
6-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Usage
This command allows you to disable the Ethernet port due to abnormal
behavior (e.g., excessive collisions), and reenable it after the problem has
been resolved. You may also want to disable the Ethernet port for security
reasons.
Example
The following example disables the Ethernet port.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#shutdown
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-ethernet)#
show interface ethernet
This command displays the status for the Ethernet interface.
Syntax
show interface [ethernet]
Default Setting
Ethernet interface
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show interface ethernet
Ethernet Interface Information
========================================
IP Address
: 192.254.2.1
: 255.255.255.0
: 192.254.2.253
: 192.254.2.55
: 10.1.0.55
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Speed-duplex
Admin status
: 100Base-TX Half Duplex
: Up
Operational status : Up
========================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
6-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Wireless Interface Commands
The commands described in this section configure connection parameters for the
wireless interfaces.
Table 25 Wireless Interface Commands
Command
interface wireless
vap
Function
Mode
GC
Page
Enters wireless interface configuration mode
6-112
6-113
Provides access to the VAP interface configuration
mode
IC-W
speed
Configures the maximum data rate at which the
access point transmits unicast packets
IC-W
6-113
turbo
Configures turbo mode to use a faster data rate
IC-W (a)
IC-W
6-114
6-115
multicast-data-rate
Configures the maximum rate for transmitting
multicast packets on the wireless interface
channel
Configures the radio channel
IC-W
IC-W
6-116
6-117
transmit-power
Adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted
from the access point
radio-mode
preamble
Forces the operating mode of the 802.11g radio
Sets the length of the 802.11g signal preamble
IC-W (b/g) 6-117
IC-W (b/g) 6-118
antenna control
Selects the antenna control method to use for the
radio
IC-W
6-119
antenna id
Selects the antenna ID to use for the radio
Selects the location of the antenna
IC-W
IC-W
IC-W
6-120
6-120
6-121
antenna location
beacon-interval
Configures the rate at which beacon signals are
transmitted from the access point
dtim-period
Configures the rate at which stations in sleep mode IC-W
must wake up to receive broadcast/multicast
transmissions
6-122
fragmentation- length
rts-threshold
Configures the minimum packet size that can be
fragmented
IC-W
6-123
6-123
Sets the packet size threshold at which an RTS must IC-W
be sent to the receiving station prior to the sending
station starting communications
super-a
Enables Atheros proprietary Super A performance
enhancements
IC-W (a)
6-124
IC-W (b/g) 6-125
IC-W-VAP 6-125
super-g
Enables Atheros proprietary Super G performance
enhancements
description
Adds a description to the wireless interface
6-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command
ssid
Function
Mode
Page
Configures the service set identifier
IC-W-VAP 6-126
IC-W-VAP 6-126
closed system
Opens access to clients without a pre-configured
SSID
max-association
Configures the maximum number of clients that can IC-W-VAP 6-127
be associated with the access point at the same time
assoc- timeout-interval
Configures the idle time interval (when no frames are IC-W-VAP 6-127
sent) after which a client is disassociated from the
VAP interface
auth- timeout-value
Configures the time interval after which clients must IC-W-VAP 6-128
be re-authenticated
shutdown
Disables the wireless interface
IC-W-VAP 6-128
show interface wireless
show station
Shows the status for the wireless interface
Exec
6-129
6-133
Shows the wireless clients associated with the access Exec
point
interface wireless
This command enters wireless interface configuration mode.
Syntax
interface wireless <a | g>
• a - 802.11a radio interface.
• g - 802.11g radio interface.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
To specify the 802.11a interface, enter the following command:
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#interface wireless a
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless a)#
6-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
vap
This command provides access to the VAP (Virtual Access Point) interface
configuration mode.
Syntax
vap <vap-id>
vap-id - The number that identifies the VAP interface. (Options: 0-3)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#vap 0
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
speed
This command configures the maximum data rate at which the access point
transmits unicast packets.
Syntax
speed <speed>
speed - Maximum access speed allowed for wireless clients.
(Options for 802.11a: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps)
(Options for 802.11b/g: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps)
Default Setting
54 Mbps
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• The maximum transmission distance is affected by the data rate. The lower
the data rate, the longer the transmission distance. Please refer to the
table for maximum distances on page 6.
• When turbo mode is enabled (page 126) for 802.11a, the effective
maximum speed specified by this command is double the entered value
6-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
(e.g., setting the speed to 54 Mbps limits the effective maximum speed to
108 Mbps).
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#speed 6
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
turbo
This command sets the access point to an enhanced proprietary modulation
mode (not regulated in IEEE 802.11a) that provides a higher data rate of up to
108 Mbps.
Syntax
turbo <static | dynamic>
no turbo
static - Always uses turbo mode.
dynamic - Will use turbo mode when no other nearby access points are
detected or active.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless - 802.11a)
Command Usage
• The normal 802.11a wireless operation mode provides connections up to
54 Mbps. Turbo Mode is an enhanced mode (not regulated in IEEE
802.11a) that provides a higher data rate of up to 108 Mbps. Enabling
Turbo Mode allows the access point to provide connections up to 108
Mbps.
• In normal mode, the access point provides a channel bandwidth of 20
MHz, and supports the maximum number of channels permitted by local
regulations (e.g., 11 channels for the United States). In Turbo Mode, the
channel bandwidth is increased to 40 MHz to support the increased data
6-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
rate. However, this reduces the number of channels supported (e.g., 5
channels for the United States).
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#turbo
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#
multicast-data-rate
This command configures the maximum data rate at which the access point
transmits multicast and management packets (excluding beacon packets) on the
wireless interface.
Syntax
multicast-data-rate <speed>
speed - Maximum transmit speed allowed for multicast data.
(Options for 802.11a: 6, 12, 24 Mbps)
(Options for 802.11b/g; 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps)
Default Setting
1 Mbps for 802.11b/g
6 Mbps for 802.11a
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#multicast-data-rate 5.5
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
6-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
channel
This command configures the radio channel through which the access point
communicates with wireless clients.
Syntax
channel <channel | auto>
• channel - Manually sets the radio channel used for communications with
wireless clients. (Range for 802.11a: 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 149,
153, 157, 161, 165 for normal mode, and 42, 50, 58, 152, 160 for turbo
mode; Range for 802.11b/g: 1 to 14)
• auto - Automatically selects an unoccupied channel (if available).
Otherwise, the lowest channel is selected.
Default Setting
Automatic channel selection
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• The available channel settings are limited by local regulations, which
determine the number of channels that are available.
• When multiple access points are deployed in the same area, be sure to
choose a channel separated by at least two channels for 802.11a to avoid
having the channels interfere with each other, and at least five channels
for 802.11b/g. You can deploy up to four access points in the same area
for 802.11a (e.g., channels 36, 56, 149, 165) and three access points for
802.11b/g (e.g., channels 1, 6, 11).
• For most wireless adapters, the channel for wireless clients is automatically
set to the same as that used by the access point to which it is linked.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#channel 1
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
6-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
transmit-power
This command adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted from the access
point.
Syntax
transmit-power <signal-strength>
signal-strength - Signal strength transmitted from the access point.
(Options: full, half, quarter, eighth, min)
Default Setting
full
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• The “min” keyword indicates minimum power.
• The longer the transmission distance, the higher the transmission power
required. But to support the maximum number of users in an area, you
must keep the power as low as possible. Power selection is not just a trade
off between coverage area and maximum supported clients. You also have
to ensure that high strength signals do not interfere with the operation of
other radio devices in your area.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#transmit-power half
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
radio-mode
This command forces the operating mode for the 802.11g wireless interface.
Syntax
radio-mode <b | g | b+g>
• b - b-only mode: Both 802.11b and 802.11g clients can communicate
with the access point, but 802.11g clients can only transfer data at
802.11b standard rates (up to 11 Mbps).
• g - g-only mode: Only 802.11g clients can communicate with the access
point (up to 54 Mbps).
• b+g - b & g mixed mode: Both 802.11b and 802.11g clients can
communicate with the access point (up to 54 Mbps).
6-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
b+g mode
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless - 802.11g)
Command Usage
• For Japan, only 13 channels are available when set to g or b+g modes.
When set to b mode, 14 channels are available.
• Both the 802.11g and 802.11b standards operate within the 2.4 GHz
band. If you are operating in g mode, any 802.11b devices in the service
area will contribute to the radio frequency noise and affect network
performance.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless g)#radio-mode g
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless g)#
preamble
This command sets the length of the signal preamble that is used at the start of a
802.11b/g data transmission.
Syntax
preamble [long | short-or-long]
• long - Sets the preamble to long (192 microseconds).
• short-or-long - Sets the preamble to short if no 802.11b clients are
detected (96 microseconds).
Default Setting
Short-or-Long
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless - 802.11b/g)
Command Usage
• Using a short preamble instead of a long preamble can increase data
throughput on the access point, but requires that all clients can support a
short preamble.
• Set the preamble to long to ensure the access point can support all
802.11b and 802.11g clients.
6-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless g)#preamble short
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless g)#
antenna control
This command selects the use of two diversity antennas or a single antenna for
the radio interface.
Syntax
antenna control <diversity | left | right>
• diversity - The radio uses both antennas in a diversity system. Select this
method when the Antenna ID is set to “Default Antenna” to use the
access point's integrated antennas. The access point does not support
external diversity antennas.
• right - To activate the 5 GHz external antenna, one must select the "right
" antenna in the antenna selection UI.
• left - To activate the 2.4 GHz external antenna, one must select the "left
" antenna in the antenna selection UI.
Default Setting
Diversity
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
The antenna ID must be selected in conjunction with the antenna control
method to configure proper use of any of the antenna options.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless g)#antenna control right
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless g)#
6-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
antenna id
This command specifies the antenna type connected to the access point
represented by a four-digit hexadecimal ID number, either the integrated diversity
antennas (the "Default Antenna") or an optional external antenna.
Syntax
antenna id <antenna-id>
• antenna-id - Specifies the ID number of an approved antenna that is
connected to the access point
(Range: 0x0000 - 0xFFFF)
Default Setting
0x0000 (built-in antennas)
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• The optional external antennas (if any) that are certified for use with the
access point are listed by typing antenna control id ?. Selecting the
correct antenna ID ensures that the access point's radio transmissions are
within regulatory power limits for the country of operation.
• The antenna ID must be selected in conjunction with the antenna control
method to configure proper use of any of the antenna options.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless g)#antenna id 0000
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless g)#
antenna location
This command selects the antenna mounting location for the radio interface.
Syntax
antenna location <indoor | outdoor>
• indoor - The antenna is mounted indoors.
• outdoor - The antenna is mounted outdoors.
6-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Default Setting
Indoor
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• When an external antenna is selected, the antenna control must be set to
“right.”
• Selecting the correct location ensures that the access point only uses radio
channels that are permitted in the country of operation.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless g)#antenna location indoor
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless g)#
beacon-interval
This command configures the rate at which beacon signals are transmitted from
the access point.
Syntax
beacon-interval <interval>
interval - The rate for transmitting beacon signals.
(Range: 20-1000 milliseconds)
Default Setting
100
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
The beacon signals allow wireless clients to maintain contact with the access
point. They may also carry power-management information.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#beacon-interval 150
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
6-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
dtim-period
This command configures the rate at which stations in sleep mode must wake up
to receive broadcast/multicast transmissions.
Syntax
dtim-period <interval>
interval - Interval between the beacon frames that transmit broadcast or
multicast traffic. (Range: 1-255 beacon frames)
Default Setting
1
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• The Delivery Traffic Indication Map (DTIM) packet interval value indicates
how often the MAC layer forwards broadcast/multicast traffic. This
parameter is necessary to wake up stations that are using Power Save
mode.
• The DTIM is the interval between two synchronous frames with
broadcast/multicast information. The default value of 2 indicates that the
access point will save all broadcast/multicast frames for the Basic Service
Set (BSS) and forward them after every second beacon.
• Using smaller DTIM intervals delivers broadcast/multicast frames in a more
timely manner, causing stations in Power Save mode to wake up more
often and drain power faster. Using higher DTIM values reduces the power
used by stations in Power Save mode, but delays the transmission of
broadcast/multicast frames.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#dtim-period 100
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
6-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
fragmentation-length
This command configures the minimum packet size that can be fragmented when
passing through the access point.
Syntax
fragmentation-length <length>
length - Minimum packet size for which fragmentation is allowed.
(Range: 256-2346 bytes)
Default Setting
2346
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• If the packet size is smaller than the preset Fragment size, the packet will
not be segmented.
• Fragmentation of the PDUs (Package Data Unit) can increase the reliability
of transmissions because it increases the probability of a successful
transmission due to smaller frame size. If there is significant interference
present, or collisions due to high network utilization, try setting the
fragment size to send smaller fragments. This will speed up the
retransmission of smaller frames. However, it is more efficient to set the
fragment size larger if very little or no interference is present because it
requires overhead to send multiple frames.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#fragmentation-length 512
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
rts-threshold
This command sets the packet size threshold at which a Request to Send (RTS)
signal must be sent to the receiving station prior to the sending station starting
communications.
Syntax
rts-threshold <threshold>
threshold - Threshold packet size for which to send an RTS.
(Range: 0-2347 bytes)
6-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
2347
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• If the threshold is set to 0, the access point always sends RTS signals. If set
to 2347, the access point never sends RTS signals. If set to any other value,
and the packet size equals or exceeds the RTS threshold, the RTS/CTS
(Request to Send / Clear to Send) mechanism will be enabled.
• The access point sends RTS frames to a receiving station to negotiate the
sending of a data frame. After receiving an RTS frame, the station sends a
CTS frame to notify the sending station that it can start sending data.
• Access points contending for the wireless medium may not be aware of
each other. The RTS/CTS mechanism can solve this “Hidden Node”
problem.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#rts-threshold 256
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
super-a
This command enables Atheros proprietary Super A performance enhancements.
Use the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] super-a
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless - 802.11a)
Command Usage
Super A enhancements include bursting, compression, and fast frames.
Maximum throughput ranges between 40 to 60 Mbps for connections to
Atheros-compatible clients.
6-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless a)#super a
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless a)#
super-g
This command enables Atheros proprietary Super G performance enhancements.
Use the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] super-g
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless - 802.11g)
Command Usage
These enhancements include bursting, compression, fast frames and
dynamic turbo. Maximum throughput ranges between 40 to 60 Mbps for
connections to Atheros-compatible clients.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless a)#super g
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless a)#
description
This command adds a description to a the wireless interface. Use the no form to
remove the description.
Syntax
description <string>
no description
string - Comment or a description for this interface.
(Range: 1-80 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
6-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#description
RD-AP#3
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
ssid
This command configures the service set identifier (SSID).
Syntax
ssid <string>
string - The name of a basic service set supported by the access point.
(Range: 1 - 32 characters)
Default Setting
802.11a Radio: VAP_TEST_11A (0 to 3)
802.11g Radio: VAP_TEST_11G (0 to 3)
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
Clients that want to connect to the wireless network via an access point
must set their SSIDs to the same as that of the access point.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#ssid RD-AP#3
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
closed-system
This command prohibits access to clients without a pre-configured SSID. Use the
no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] closed-system
Default Setting
Disabled
6-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
When closed system is enabled, the access point will not include its SSID in
beacon messages. Nor will it respond to probe requests from clients that do
not include a fixed SSID.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#closed-system
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
max-association
This command configures the maximum number of clients that can be associated
with the access point at the same time.
Syntax
max-association <count>
count - Maximum number of associated stations. (Range: 0-64)
Default Setting
64
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#max-association 32
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
assoc-timeout-interval
This command configures the idle time interval (when no frames are sent) after
which the client is disassociated from the VAP interface.
Syntax
assoc-timeout-interval <minutes>
minutes - The number of minutes of inactivity before disassociation.
(Range: 5-60)
6-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
30
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g:
VAP[0])#association-timeout-interval 20
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
auth-timeout-value
This command configures the time interval within which clients must complete
authentication to the VAP interface.
Syntax
auth-timeout-value <minutes>
minutes - The number of minutes before re-authentication.
(Range: 5-60)
Default Setting
60
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#auth-timeout-value
40
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
shutdown
This command disables the wireless interface. Use the no form to restart the
interface.
Syntax
[no] shutdown
Default Setting
Interface enabled
6-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
You must first enable VAP interface 0 before you can enable VAP interfaces
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#shutdown
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
show interface wireless
This command displays the status for the wireless interface.
Syntax
show interface wireless <a | g> vap-id
• a - 802.11a radio interface.
• g - 802.11g radio interface.
• vap-id - The number that identifies the VAP interface. (Options: 0~3)
6-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show interface wireless g 0
Wireless Interface Information
=========================================================================
----------------Identification-------------------------------------------
Description
SSID
: Enterprise 802.11g Access Point
: VAP_G 0
Channel
: 1 (AUTO)
Status
: ENABLED
MAC Address
: 00:03:7f:fe:03:02
----------------802.11 Parameters----------------------------------------
Radio Mode
Protection Method
Transmit Power
Max Station Data Rate
Multicast Data Rate
Fragmentation Threshold
RTS Threshold
: b & g mixed mode
: CTS only
: FULL (16 dBm)
: 54Mbps
: 5.5Mbps
: 2346 bytes
: 2347 bytes
: 100 TUs
Beacon Interval
Authentication Timeout Interval : 60 Mins
Association Timeout Interval
DTIM Interval
Preamble Length
: 30 Mins
: 1 beacon
: LONG
Maximum Association
MIC Mode
Super G
VLAN ID
: 64 stations
: Software
: Disabled
: 1
.
.
6-130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
----------------Security-------------------------------------------------
Closed System
: Disabled
: WEP
Multicast cipher
Unicast cipher
WPA clients
WPA Key Mgmt Mode
WPA PSK Key Type
WPA PSK Key
: TKIP and AES
: DISABLED
: PRE SHARED KEY
: PASSPHRASE
: EMPTY
PMKSA Lifetime
Encryption
: 720 minutes
: ENABLED
Default Transmit Key
Common Static Keys
: 1
: Key 1: EMPTY
Key 3: EMPTY
: DISABLED
: SHARED
Key 2: EMPTY
Key 4: EMPTY
Pre-Authentication
Authentication Type
----------------802.1x-------------------------------------------
802.1x
: DISABLED
: 30 min
: 30 min
: 0 min
Broadcast Key Refresh Rate
Session Key Refresh Rate
802.1x Session Timeout Value
----------------Antenna--------------------------------------------------
Antenna Control method
Antenna ID
Antenna Location
: Diversity
: 0x0000(Default Antenna)
: Indoor
----------------Quality of Service---------------------------------------
WMM Mode
: SUPPORTED
WMM Acknowledge Policy
AC0(Best Effort)
AC1(Background)
AC2(Video)
: Acknowledge
: Acknowledge
: Acknowledge
: Acknowledge
AC3(Voice)
WMM BSS Parameters
AC0(Best Effort)
: logCwMin: 4 logCwMax: 10 AIFSN: 3
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 0.000 ms
AC1(Background)
: logCwMin: 4 logCwMax: 10 AIFSN: 7
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 0.000 ms
AC2(Video)
: logCwMin: 3 logCwMax: 4 AIFSN: 2
.
.
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 3.008 ms
AC3(Voice)
: logCwMin: 2 logCwMax: 3 AIFSN: 2
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 1.504 ms
6-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
WMM AP Parameters
AC0(Best Effort)
AC1(Background)
AC2(Video)
: logCwMin: 4 logCwMax: 6 AIFSN: 3
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 0.000 ms
: logCwMin: 4 logCwMax: 10 AIFSN: 7
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 0.000 ms
: logCwMin: 3 logCwMax: 4 AIFSN: 1
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 3.008 ms
AC3(Voice)
: logCwMin: 2 logCwMax: 3 AIFSN: 1
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 1.504 ms
=========================================================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
6-132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
show station
This command shows the wireless clients associated with the access point.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show station
Station Table Information
========================================================
if-wireless A VAP [0]
802.11a Channel : 60
:
No 802.11a Channel Stations.
.
.
.
if-wireless G VAP [0]
802.11g Channel : 1
:
802.11g Channel Station Table
Station Address
: 00-04-23-94-9A-9C VLAN ID: 0
Authenticated Associated
Forwarding
FALSE
bytes
0
KeyType
NONE
TRUE
Counters:pkts
FALSE
Tx
/
20/
Rx
Tx
/
Rx
721/
0
Time:Associated LastAssoc
LastDisAssoc LastAuth
0
0
0
0
if-wireless G VAP [1]
802.11g Channel : 1
:
No 802.11g Channel Stations.
.
.
.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
Rogue AP Detection Commands
A “rogue AP” is either an access point that is not authorized to participate in the
wireless network, or an access point that does not have the correct security
configuration. Rogue APs can potentially allow unauthorized users access to the
network. Alternatively, client stations may mistakenly associate to a rogue AP and
be prevented from accessing network resources. Rogue APs may also cause radio
interference and degrade the wireless LAN performance.
6-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
The access point can be configured to periodically scan all radio channels and find
other access points within range. A database of nearby access points is
maintained where any rogue APs can be identified.
Table 26 Rogue AP Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
rogue-ap enable
Enables the periodic detection of other nearby access GC
points
6-134
rogue-ap authenticate
rogue-ap duration
rogue-ap interval
rogue-ap scan
Enables identification of all access points
Sets the duration that all channels are scanned
Sets the time between each scan
GC
GC
GC
GC
6-135
6-136
6-136
6-137
6-139
Forces an immediate scan of all radio channels
show rogue-ap
Shows the current database of detected access points Exec
rogue-ap enable
This command enables the periodic detection of nearby access points. Use the no
form to disable periodic detection.
Syntax
[no] rogue-ap enable
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• While the access point scans a channel for rogue APs, wireless clients will
not be able to connect to the access point. Therefore, avoid frequent
scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a reason to believe that
more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP.
• A “rogue AP” is either an access point that is not authorized to participate
in the wireless network, or an access point that does not have the correct
security configuration. Rogue access points can be identified by unknown
BSSID (MAC address) or SSID configuration. A database of nearby access
points should therefore be maintained on a RADIUS server, allowing any
rogue APs to be identified (see “rogue-ap authenticate” on page 135).
6-134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
The rogue AP database can be viewed using the show rogue-ap
command.
• The access point sends Syslog messages for each detected access point
during a rogue AP scan.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#rogue-ap enable
configure either syslog or trap or both to receive the rogue APs detected.
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
rogue-ap authenticate
This command forces the unit to authenticate all access points on the network.
Use the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] rogue-ap authenticate
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
Enabling authentication in conjunction with a database of approved access
points stored on a RADIUS server allows the access point to discover rogue
APs. With authentication enabled and a configure RADIUS server, the access
point checks the MAC address/Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID) of each
access point that it finds against a RADIUS server to determine whether the
access point is allowed. With authentication disabled, the access point can
identify its neighboring access points only; it cannot identify whether the
6-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
access points are allowed or are rogues. If you enable authentication, you
should also configure a RADIUS server for this access point (see “RADIUS”
on page 8).
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#rogue-ap authenticate
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
rogue-ap duration
This command sets the scan duration for detecting access points.
Syntax
rogue-ap duration <milliseconds>
milliseconds - The duration of the scan. (Range: 100-1000 milliseconds)
Default Setting
350 milliseconds
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• During a scan, client access may be disrupted and new clients may not be
able to associate to the access point. If clients experience severe
disruption, reduce the scan duration time.
• A long scan duration time will detect more access points in the area, but
causes more disruption to client access.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#rogue-ap duration 200
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
Related Commands
rogue-ap interval (6-136)
rogue-ap interval
This command sets the interval at which to scan for access points.
6-136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Syntax
rogue-ap interval <minutes>
minutes - The interval between consecutive scans. (Range: 30-10080
minutes)
Default Setting
720 minutes
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
This command sets the interval at which scans occur. Frequent scanning will
more readily detect other access points, but will cause more disruption to
client access.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#rogue-ap interval 120
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
Related Commands
rogue-ap duration (6-136)
rogue-ap scan
This command starts an immediate scan for access points on the radio interface.
6-137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
While the access point scans a channel for rogue APs, wireless clients will
not be able to connect to the access point. Therefore, avoid frequent
scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a reason to believe that
more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#rogue-ap scan
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#rogueApDetect Completed
(Radio G) : 9 APs detected
rogueAPDetect (Radio G): refreshing ap database now
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
6-138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
show rogue-ap
This command displays the current rogue AP database.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show rogue-ap
802.11a Channel : Rogue AP Status
AP Address(BSSID)
SSID
Channel(MHz) RSSI Type Privacy RSN
======================================================================
802.11g Channel : Rogue AP Status
AP Address(BSSID)
SSID
Channel(MHz) RSSI Type Privacy RSN
======================================================================
00-04-e2-2a-37-23
00-04-e2-2a-37-3d
00-04-e2-2a-37-49
00-90-d1-08-9d-a7
00-30-f1-fb-31-f4
WLAN1AP
ANY
WLAN1AP
WLAN1AP
WLAN
11(2462 MHz)
7(2442 MHz)
9(2452 MHz)
1(2412 MHz)
6(2437 MHz)
17 ESS
42 ESS
42 ESS
12 ESS
16 ESS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
Wireless Security Commands
The commands described in this section configure parameters for wireless security
on the 802.11a and 802.11g interfaces.
Table 27 Wireless Security Commands
Command
auth
Function
Mode
Page
Defines the 802.11 authentication type allowed by
the access point
IC-W-VAP 6-143
encryption
Defines whether or not WEP encryption is used to
provide privacy for wireless communications
IC-W-VAP 6-142
key
Sets the keys used for WEP encryption
IC-W
6-143
transmit-key
Sets the index of the key to be used for encrypting
data frames sent between the access point and
wireless clients
IC-W-VAP 6-144
cipher-suite
Selects an encryption method for the global key used IC-W-VAP 6-145
for multicast and broadcast traffic
mic_mode
Specifies how to calculate the Message Integrity
Check (MIC)
IC-W
6-146
wpa-pre-shared- key
Defines a WPA preshared-key value
IC-W-VAP 6-147
6-139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command
Function
Mode
Page
pmksa-lifetime
pre-authentication
Sets the lifetime PMK security associations
Enables WPA2 pre-authentication for fast roaming
IC-W-VAP 6-148
IC-W-VAP 6-149
auth
This command configures authentication for the VAP interface.
Syntax
auth <open-system | shared-key | wpa | wpa-psk | wpa2 | wpa2-psk |
wpa-wpa2-mixed | wpa-wpa2-psk-mixed | > <required | supported>
• open-system - Accepts the client without verifying its identity using a
shared key. “Open” authentication means either there is no encryption (if
encryption is disabled) or WEP-only encryption is used (if encryption is
enabled).
• shared-key - Authentication is based on a shared key that has been
distributed to all stations.
• wpa - Clients using WPA are accepted for authentication.
• wpa-psk - Clients using WPA with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for
authentication.
• wpa2 - Clients using WPA2 are accepted for authentication.
• wpa2-psk - Clients using WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for
authentication.
• wpa-wpa2-mixed - Clients using WPA or WPA2 are accepted for
authentication.
• wpa-wpa2-psk-mixed - Clients using WPA or WPA2 with a Pre-shared
Key are accepted for authentication
• required - Clients are required to use WPA or WPA2.
• supported - Clients may use WPA or WPA2, if supported.
Default Setting
open-system
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• The auth command automatically configures settings for each
authentication type, including encryption, 802.1X, and cipher suite. The
command auth open-system disables encryption and 802.1X.
6-140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
• To use WEP shared-key authentication, set the authentication type to
“shared-key” and define at least one static WEP key with the key
command. Encryption is automatically enabled by the command.
and define at least one static WEP key with the key command.
• When any WPA or WPA2 option is selected, clients are authenticated
using 802.1X via a RADIUS server. Each client must be WPA-enabled or
support 802.1X client software. The 802.1X settings (see “802.1X
Authentication” on page 71) and RADIUS server details (see “RADIUS
Client” on page 65) must be configured on the access point. A RADIUS
server must also be configured and be available in the wired network.
• If a WPA/WPA2 mode that operates over 802.1X is selected (WPA, WPA2,
WPA-WPA2-mixed, or WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixed), the 802.1X settings (see
“802.1X Authentication” on page 71) and RADIUS server details (see
“RADIUS Client” on page 65) must be configured. Be sure you have also
configured a RADIUS server on the network before enabling
authentication. Also, note that each client has to be WPA-enabled or
and be available in the wired network.
• If a WPA/WPA2 Pre-shared Key mode is selected (WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK or
WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixed), the key must first be generated and distributed
to all wireless clients before they can successfully associate with the access
point. Use the wpa-preshared-key command to configure the key (see
“key” on page 143 and “transmit-key” on page 144).
• WPA2 defines a transitional mode of operation for networks moving from
WPA security to WPA2. WPA2 Mixed Mode allows both WPA and WPA2
clients to associate to a common VAP interface. When the encryption
cipher suite is set to TKIP, the unicast encryption cipher (TKIP or
AES-CCMP) is negotiated for each client. The access point advertises it’s
supported encryption ciphers in beacon frames and probe responses. WPA
and WPA2 clients select the cipher they support and return the choice in
the association request to the access point. For mixed-mode operation, the
cipher used for broadcast frames is always TKIP. WEP encryption is not
allowed.
• The “required” option places the VAP into TKIP only mode. The
“supported” option places the VAP into TKIP+AES+WEP mode. The
“required” mode is used in WPA-only environments.
• The “supported” mode can be used for mixed environments with legacy
WPA products, specifically WEP. (For example, WPA+WEP. The
WPA2+WEP environment is not available because WPA2 does not support
6-141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
WEP). To place the VAP into AES only mode, use “required” and then
select the “cipher-ccmp” option for the cipher-suite command.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#auth shared-key
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
Related Commands
encryption (6-142)
key (6-143)
encryption
This command enables data encryption for wireless communications. Use the no
form to disable data encryption.
Syntax
[no] encryption
Default Setting
disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is implemented in this device to prevent
unauthorized access to your wireless network. For more secure data
transmissions, enable encryption with this command, and set at least one
static WEP key with the key command.
• The WEP settings must be the same on each client in your wireless
network.
• Note that WEP protects data transmitted between wireless nodes, but
does not protect any transmissions over your wired network or over the
Internet.
• You must enable data encryption in order to enable all types of encryption
(WEP, TKIP, and AES-CCMP) in the access point.
6-142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#encryption
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
Related Commands
key (6-143)
key
This command sets the keys used for WEP encryption. Use the no form to delete
a configured key.
Syntax
key <index> <size> <type> <value>
no key index
• index - Key index. (Range: 1-4)
• size - Key size. (Options: 64, 128, or 152 bits)
• type - Input format. (Options: ASCII, HEX)
• value - The key string.
- For 64-bit keys, use 5 alphanumeric characters or 10 hexadecimal digits.
- For 128-bit keys, use 13 alphanumeric characters or 26 hexadecimal
digits.
- For 152-bit keys, use 16 alphanumeric characters or 32 hexadecimal
digits.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• To enable Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), use the auth shared-key
command to select the “shared key” authentication type, use the key
command to configure at least one key, and use the transmit-key
command to assign a key to one of the VAP interfaces.
• If WEP option is enabled, all wireless clients must be configured with the
same shared keys to communicate with the access point.
• The encryption index, length and type configured in the access point must
match those configured in the clients.
6-143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#key 1 64 hex 1234512345
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#key 2 128 ascii
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
Related Commands
key (6-143)
encryption (6-142)
transmit-key (6-144)
transmit-key
This command sets the index of the key to be used for encrypting data frames for
broadcast or multicast traffic transmitted from the VAP to wireless clients.
Syntax
transmit-key <index>
index - Key index. (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
1
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• If you use WEP key encryption option, the access point uses the transmit
key to encrypt multicast and broadcast data signals that it sends to client
devices. Other keys can be used for decryption of data from clients.
• When using IEEE 802.1X, the access point uses a dynamic key to encrypt
unicast and broadcast messages to 802.1X-enabled clients. However,
because the access point sends the keys during the 802.1X authentication
process, these keys do not have to appear in the client’s key list.
6-144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
• In a mixed-mode environment with clients using static and dynamic keys,
select transmit key index 2, 3, or 4. The access point uses transmit key
index 1 for the generation of dynamic keys.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#transmit-key 2
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
cipher-suite
This command defines the cipher algorithm used to encrypt the global key for
broadcast and multicast traffic when using Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) security.
Syntax
cipher-suite <aes-ccmp | tkip | wep>
• aes-ccmp - Use AES-CCMP encryption for the unicast and multicast
cipher.
• tkip - Use TKIP encryption for the multicast cipher. TKIP or AES-CCMP can
be used for the unicast cipher depending on the capability of the client.
• wep - Use WEP encryption for the multicast cipher. TKIP or AES-CCMP can
be used for the unicast cipher depending on the capability of the client.
Default Setting
wep
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• WPA enables the access point to support different unicast encryption keys
for each client. However, the global encryption key for multicast and
broadcast traffic must be the same for all clients.
• If any clients supported by the access point are not WPA enabled, the
cipher-suite algorithm must be set to WEP.
• WEP is the first generation security protocol used to encrypt data crossing
the wireless medium using a fairly short key. Communicating devices must
use the same WEP key to encrypt and decrypt radio signals. WEP has many
security flaws, and is not recommended for transmitting highly sensitive
data.
• TKIP provides data encryption enhancements including per-packet key
hashing (i.e., changing the encryption key on each packet), a message
integrity check, an extended initialization vector with sequencing rules,
6-145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
and a re-keying mechanism. Select TKIP if there are clients in the network
that are not WPA2 compliant.
• TKIP defends against attacks on WEP in which the unencrypted
initialization vector in encrypted packets is used to calculate the WEP key.
TKIP changes the encryption key on each packet, and rotates not just the
unicast keys, but the broadcast keys as well. TKIP is a replacement for WEP
that removes the predictability that intruders relied on to determine the
WEP key.
• AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard Counter-Mode/CBCMAC
Protocol): WPA2 is backward compatible with WPA, including the same
802.1X and PSK modes of operation and support for TKIP encryption. The
main enhancement is its use of AES Counter-Mode encryption with Cipher
Block Chaining Message Authentication Code (CBC-MAC) for message
integrity. The AES Counter-Mode/CBCMAC Protocol (AES-CCMP)
provides extremely robust data confidentiality using a 128-bit key. The
AES-CCMP encryption cipher is specified as a standard requirement for
WPA2. However, the computational intensive operations of AES-CCMP
requires hardware support on client devices. Therefore to implement
WPA2 in the network, wireless clients must be upgraded to
WPA2-compliant hardware.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#cipher-suite TKIP
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
mic_mode
This command specifies how to calculate the Message Integrity Check (MIC).
Syntax
mic_mode <hardware | software>
• hardware - Uses hardware to calculate the MIC.
• software - Uses software to calculate the MIC.
Default Setting
software
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• The Michael Integrity Check (MIC) is part of the Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol (TKIP) encryption used in Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) security.
6-146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
The MIC calculation is performed in the access point for each transmitted
packet and this can impact throughput and performance. The access point
supports a choice of hardware or software for MIC calculation. The
performance of the access point can be improved by selecting the best
method for the specific deployment.
• Using the “hardware” option provides best performance when the
number of supported clients is less than 27.
• Using the “software” option provides the best performance for a large
number of clients on one radio interface. Throughput may be reduced
when both 802.11a and 802.11g interfaces are supporting a high number
of clients simultaneously.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless a)#mic_mode hardware
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
wpa-pre-shared-key
This command defines a Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA/WPA2) Pre-shared-key.
Syntax
wpa-pre-shared-key <hex | passphrase-key> <value>
• hex - Specifies hexadecimal digits as the key input format.
• passphrase-key - Specifies an ASCII pass-phrase string as the key input
format.
• value - The key string. For ASCII input, specify a string between 8 and 63
characters. For HEX input, specify exactly 64 digits.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• To support WPA or WPA2 for client authentication, use the auth
command to specify the authentication type, and use the
wpa-preshared-key command to specify one static key.
• If WPA or WPA2 is used with pre-shared-key mode, all wireless clients
must be configured with the same pre-shared key to communicate with
the access point’s VAP interface.
6-147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#wpa-pre-shared-key
ASCII agoodsecret
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g)#
Related Commands
auth (6-140)
pmksa-lifetime
This command sets the time for aging out cached WPA2 Pairwise Master Key
Security Association (PMKSA) information for fast roaming.
Syntax
pmksa-lifetime <minutes>
minutes - The time for aging out PMKSA information.
(Range: 0 - 14400 minutes)
Default Setting
720 minutes
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• WPA2 provides fast roaming for authenticated clients by retaining keys
and other security information in a cache, so that if a client roams away
from an access point and then returns reauthentication is not required.
• When a WPA2 client is first authenticated, it receives a Pairwise Master
Key (PMK) that is used to generate other keys for unicast data encryption.
This key and other client information form a Security Association that the
access point names and holds in a cache. The lifetime of this security
association can be configured with this command. When the lifetime
expires, the client security association and keys are deleted from the cache.
If the client returns to the access point, it requires full reauthentication.
• The access point can store up to 256 entries in the PMKSA cache.
6-148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#wpa-pre-shared-key
ASCII agoodsecret
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
pre-authentication
This command enables WPA2 pre-authentication for fast secure roaming.
Syntax
pre-authentication <enable | disable>
• enable - Enables pre-authentication for the VAP interface.
• disable - Disables pre-authentication for the VAP interface.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• Each time a client roams to another access point it has to be fully
re-authenticated. This authentication process is time consuming and can
disrupt applications running over the network. WPA2 includes a
mechanism, known as pre-authentication, that allows clients to roam to a
new access point and be quickly associated. The first time a client is
authenticated to a wireless network it has to be fully authenticated. When
the client is about to roam to another access point in the network, the
access point sends pre-authentication messages to the new access point
that include the client’s security association information. Then when the
client sends an association request to the new access point the client is
known to be already authenticated, so it proceeds directly to key exchange
and association.
• To support pre-authentication, both clients and access points in the
network must be WPA2 enabled.
• Pre-authentication requires all access points in the network to be on the
same IP subnet.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#wpa-pre-shared-key
ASCII agoodsecret
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
6-149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Link Integrity Commands
The access point provides a link integrity feature that can be used to ensure that
wireless clients are connected to resources on the wired network. The access
point does this by periodically sending Ping messages to a host device in the
wired Ethernet network. If the access point detects that the connection to the
host has failed, it disables the radio interfaces, forcing clients to find and associate
with another access point. When the connection to the host is restored, the
access point re-enables the radio interfaces.
Table 28 Link Integrity Commands
Command
Function
Mode
GC
Page
link-integrity ping-detect
link-integrity ping-host
Enables link integrity detection
6-150
6-151
Specifies the IP address of a host device in the
wired network
GC
link-integrity ping-interval
link-integrity ping-fail-retry
Specifies the time between each Ping sent to the GC
link host
6-151
6-152
Specifies the number of consecutive failed Ping
counts before the link is determined as lost
GC
link-integrity ethernet-detect Enables integrity check for Ethernet link
show link-integrity Displays the current link integrity configuration
GC
6-152
6-153
Exec
link-integrity ping-detect
This command enables link integrity detection. Use the no form to disable link
integrity detection.
Syntax
[no] link-integrity ping-detect
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• When link integrity is enabled, the IP address of a host device in the wired
network must be specified.
• The access point periodically sends an ICMP echo request (Ping) packet to
the link host IP address. When the number of failed responses (either the
6-150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
host does not respond or is unreachable) exceeds the limit set by the
link-integrity ping-fail-retry command, the link is determined as lost.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#link-integrity ping-detect
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
link-integrity ping-host
This command configures the link host name or IP address. Use the no form to
remove the host setting.
Syntax
link-integrity ping-host <host_name | ip_address>
no link-integrity ping-host
• host_name - Alias of the host.
• ip_address - IP address of the host.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#link-integrity ping-host
192.254.2.10
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
link-integrity ping-interval
This command configures the time between each Ping sent to the link host.
Syntax
link-integrity ping-interval <interval>
interval - The time between Pings. (Range: 5 - 60 seconds)
Default Setting
30 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
6-151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#link-integrity ping-interval 20
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
link-integrity ping-fail-retry
This command configures the number of consecutive failed Ping counts before
the link is determined as lost.
Syntax
link-integrity ping-fail-retry <counts>
counts - The number of failed Ping counts before the link is determined
as lost. (Range: 1 - 10)
Default Setting
6
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#link-integrity ping-fail-retry 10
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
link-integrity ethernet-detect
This command enables an integrity check to determine whether or not the access
point is connected to the wired Ethernet.
6-152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Syntax
[no] link-integrity ethernet-detect
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#link-integrity ethernet-detect
Notification : Ethernet Link Detect SUCCESS - RADIO(S) ENABLED
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
show link-integrity
This command displays the current link integrity configuration.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #show link-integrity
Link Integrity Information
===========================================================
Ethernet Detect : Enabled
Ping Detect
: Enabled
Target IP/Name : 192.254.0.140
Ping Fail Retry : 6
Ping Interval
: 30
===========================================================
Outdoor 11a Building to Building #
IAPP Commands
The command described in this section enables the protocol signaling required to
ensure the successful handover of wireless clients roaming between different
802.11f-compliant access points. In other words, the 802.11f protocol can ensure
successful roaming between access points in a multi-vendor environment.
6-153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
iapp
This command enables the protocol signaling required to hand over wireless
clients roaming between different 802.11f-compliant access points. Use the no
form to disable 802.11f signaling.
Syntax
[no] iapp
Default
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The current 802.11 standard does not specify the signaling required
between access points in order to support clients roaming from one access
point to another. In particular, this can create a problem for clients roaming
between access points from different vendors. This command is used to
enable or disable 802.11f handover signaling between different access
points, especially in a multi-vendor environment.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#iapp
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
VLAN Commands
The access point can enable the support of VLAN-tagged traffic passing between
wireless clients and the wired network. Up to 64 VLAN IDs can be mapped to
specific wireless clients, allowing users to remain within the same VLAN as they
move around a campus site.
When VLAN is enabled on the access point, a VLAN ID (a number between 1 and
4094) can be assigned to each client after successful authentication using IEEE
802.1X and a central RADIUS server. The user VLAN IDs must be configured on
the RADIUS server for each user authorized to access the network. If a user does
not have a configured VLAN ID, the access point assigns the user to its own
configured native VLAN ID.
6-154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
NOTE: When VLANs are enabled, the access point’s Ethernet port drops all
received traffic that does not include a VLAN tag. To maintain network
connectivity to the access point and wireless clients, be sure that the access point
is connected to a device port on a wired network that supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
tags.
The VLAN commands supported by the access point are listed below.
Table 29 VLAN Commands
Command
vlan
Function
Mode
GC
Page
Enables a single VLAN for all traffic
6-156
6-156
management-
vlanid
Configures the management VLAN for the access point GC
vlan-id
Configures the default VLAN for the VAP interface
IC-W-VAP 6-157
6-155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
vlan
This command enables VLANs for all traffic. Use the no form to disable VLANs.
Syntax
[no] vlan enable
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Description
• When VLANs are enabled, the access point tags frames received from
wireless clients with the VLAN ID configured for each client on the RADIUS
server. If the VLAN ID has not been configured for a client on the RADIUS
server, then the frames are tagged with the access point’s native VLAN ID.
• Traffic entering the Ethernet port must be tagged with a VLAN ID that
matches the access point’s native VLAN ID, or with a VLAN tag that
matches one of the wireless clients currently associated with the access
point.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#vlan enable
Reboot system now? <y/n>: y
Related Commands
management-vlanid (6-156)
management-vlanid
This command configures the management VLAN ID for the access point.
Syntax
management-vlanid <vlan-id>
vlan-id - Management VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)
6-156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Default Setting
1
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The management VLAN is for managing the access point. For example, the
access point allows traffic that is tagged with the specified VLAN to manage
the access point via remote management, SSH, SNMP, Telnet, etc.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#management-vlanid 3
Outdoor 11a Building to Building (config)#
Related Commands
vlan (6-156)
vlan-id
This command configures the default VLAN ID for the VAP interface.
Syntax
vlan-id <vlan-id>
vlan-id - Native VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
1
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• To implement the default VLAN ID setting for VAP interface, the access
point must enable VLAN support using the vlan command.
• When VLANs are enabled, the access point tags frames received from
wireless clients with the default VLAN ID for the VAP interface. If IEEE
802.1X is being used to authenticate wireless clients, specific VLAN IDs can
be configured on the RADIUS server to be assigned to each client. Using
IEEE 802.1X and a central RADIUS server, up to 64 VLAN IDs can be
mapped to specific wireless clients.
6-157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
• If the VLAN ID has not been configured for a client on the RADIUS server,
then the frames are tagged with the default VLAN ID of the VAP interface.
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#vlan-id 3
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
WMM Commands
The access point implements QoS using the Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) standard.
Using WMM, the access point is able to prioritize traffic and optimize
performance when multiple applications compete for wireless network
bandwidth at the same time. WMM employs techniques that are a subset of the
developing IEEE 802.11e QoS standard and it enables the access point to
inter-operate with both WMM- enabled clients and other devices that may lack
any WMM functionality.
The WMM commands supported by the access point are listed below.
Table 30 WMM Commands
Command
wmm
Function
Mode
IC-W
Page
Sets the WMM operational mode on the access point
6-158
6-159
wmm-acknowledge-
policy
Allows the acknowledgement wait time to be enabled IC-W
or disabled for each Access Category (AC)
wmmparam
Configures detailed WMM parameters that apply to the IC-W
access point (AP) or the wireless clients (BSS)
6-160
wmm
This command sets the WMM operational mode on the access point. Use the no
form to disable WMM.
Syntax
[no] wmm <supported | required>
• supported - WMM will be used for any associated device that supports
this feature. Devices that do not support this feature may still associate
with the access point.
• required - WMM must be supported on any device trying to associated
with the access point. Devices that do not support this feature will not be
allowed to associate with the access point.
6-158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Default
supported
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#wmm required
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#
wmm-acknowledge-policy
This command allows the acknowledgement wait time to be enabled or disabled
for each Access Category (AC).
Syntax
wmm-acknowledge-policy <ac_number> <ack | noack>
• ac_number - Access categories. (Range: 0-3)
• ack - Require the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the
receiver.
• noack - Does not require the sender to wait for an acknowledgement
from the receiver.
Default
ack
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• WMM defines four access categories (ACs) – voice, video, best effort, and
background. These categories correspond to traffic priority levels and are
mapped to IEEE 802.1D priority tags (see Table ). The direct mapping of
the four ACs to 802.1D priorities is specifically intended to facilitate
interpretability with other wired network QoS policies. While the four ACs
are specified for specific types of traffic, WMM allows the priority levels to
be configured to match any network-wide QoS policy. WMM also specifies
a protocol that access points can use to communicate the configured
traffic priority levels to QoS-enabled wireless clients.
• Although turning off the requirement for the sender to wait for an
acknowledgement can increases data throughput, it can also result in a
high number of errors when traffic levels are heavy.
6-159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#wmm-acknowledge-policy 0
noack
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#
wmmparam
This command configures detailed WMM parameters that apply to the access
point (AP) or the wireless clients (BSS).
Syntax
wmmparam <AP | BSS> <ac_number> <LogCwMin> <LogCwMax>
<AIFS> <TxOpLimit> <admission_control>
• AP - Access Point
• BSS - Wireless client
• ac_number - Access categories (ACs) – voice, video, best effort, and
background. These categories correspond to traffic priority levels and are
mapped to IEEE 802.1D priority tags as shown in Table . (Range: 0-3)
• LogCwMin - Minimum log value of the contention window. This is the
initial upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless medium
access can be attempted. The initial wait time is a random value between
zero and the LogCwMin value. Specify the LogCwMin value. Note that the
LogCwMin value must be equal or less than the LogCwMax value.
(Range: 1-15 microseconds)
• LogCwMax - Maximum log value of the contention window. This is the
maximum upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless
medium access can be attempted. The contention window is doubled
after each detected collision up to the LogCwMax value. Note that the
CWMax value must be greater or equal to the LogCwMin value.
(Range: 1-15 microseconds)
• AIFS - Arbitrary InterFrame Space specifies the minimum amount of wait
time before the next data transmission attempt.
(Range: 1-15 microseconds)
• TXOPLimit - Transmission Opportunity Limit specifies the maximum time
an AC transmit queue has access to the wireless medium. When an AC
queue is granted a transmit opportunity, it can transmit data for a time up
to the TxOpLimit. This data bursting greatly improves the efficiency for
high data-rate traffic. (Range: 0-65535 microseconds)
• admission_control - The admission control mode for the access category.
When enabled, clients are blocked from using the access category.
(Options: 0 to disable, 1 to enable)
6-160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Command Line Interface
Default
AP Parameters
WMM Parameters AC0 (Best Effort)
AC1 (Background) AC2 (Video)
AC3 (Voice)
LogCwMin
LogCwMax
AIFS
4
4
3
2
10
3
10
4
3
7
2
2
TXOP Limit
0
0
94
47
Admission Control Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
BSS Parameters
WMM Parameters AC0 (Best Effort)
AC1 (Background) AC2 (Video)
AC3 (Voice)
LogCwMin
LogCwMax
AIFS
4
6
3
0
4
3
2
10
4
3
7
1
1
TXOP Limit
0
94
47
Admission Control Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Example
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#wmmparams ap 0 4 6 3 1 1
Outdoor 11a Building to Building(if-wireless a)#
6-161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
6-162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the following items before you contact local Technical Support.
1
If wireless bridge units do not associate with each other, check the following:
„
Check the power injector LED for each bridge unit to be sure that power is
being supplied.
„
„
„
Be sure that antennas in the link are properly aligned.
Be sure that channel settings match on all bridges.
If encryption is enabled, ensure that all bridge links are configured with the
same encryption keys.
2
If you experience poor performance (high packet loss rate) over the wireless
bridge link:
„
„
„
Check that the range of the link is within the limits for the antennas used.
Be sure that antennas in the link are properly aligned.
Check that there is an unobstructed radio line-of-sight between the
antennas.
„
„
Be sure there is no interference from other radio sources. Try setting the
bridge link to another radio channel.
Be sure there is no other radio transmitter too close to either antenna. If
necessary, move the antennas to another location.
3
If wireless clients cannot access the network, check the following:
„
Be sure the bridge and the wireless clients are configured with the same
Service Set ID (SSID).
„
If authentication or encryption are enabled, ensure that the wireless clients
are properly configured with the appropriate authentication or encryption
keys.
„
If authentication is being performed through a RADIUS server, ensure that
the clients are properly configured on the RADIUS server.
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
„
If authentication is being performed through IEEE 802.1X, be sure the
wireless users have installed and properly configured 802.1X client
software.
„
„
If MAC address filtering is enabled, be sure the client’s address is included
in the local filtering database or on the RADIUS server database.
If the wireless clients are roaming between bridges, make sure that all the
bridges and wireless devices in the Extended Service Set (ESS) are
configured to the same SSID, and authentication method.
4
If the bridge cannot be configured using the Telnet, a web browser, or SNMP
software:
„
Be sure to have configured the bridge with a valid IP address, subnet mask
and default gateway.
„
If VLANs are enabled on the bridge, the management station should be
configured to send tagged frames with a VLAN ID that matches the
bridge’s management VLAN (default VLAN 1, page 15). However, to
manage the bridge from a wireless client, the AP Management Filter should
be disabled (page 15).
„
„
Check that you have a valid network connection to the bridge and that the
Ethernet port or the wireless interface that you are using has not been
disabled.
If you are connecting to the bridge through the wired Ethernet interface,
check the network cabling between the management station and the
bridge. If you are connecting to bridge from a wireless client, ensure that
you have a valid connection to the bridge.
„
If you cannot connect using Telnet, you may have exceeded the maximum
number of concurrent Telnet sessions permitted (i.e, four sessions). Try
connecting again at a later time.
5
If you cannot access the on-board configuration program via a serial port
connection:
„
Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible,
8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity and 9600 bps.
„
Check that the serial cable conforms to the pin-out connections provided
on page B-3.
6
7
If you forgot or lost the password:
Contact your local Technical Support for help.
„
If all other recovery measure fail, and the bridge is still not functioning
properly, take any of these steps:
A-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
„
Reset the bridge’s hardware using the console interface, web interface, or
through a power reset.
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B CABLES AND PINOUTS
TWISTED-PAIR CABLE ASSIGNMENTS
For 10/100BASE-TX connections, a twisted-pair cable must have two pairs of
wires. Each wire pair is identified by two different colors. For example, one wire
might be green and the other, green with white stripes. Also, an RJ-45 connector
must be attached to both ends of the cable.
CAUTION: Each wire pair must be attached to the RJ-45 connectors in a specific
orientation.
!
!
CAUTION: DO NOT plug a phone jack connector into a power injector RJ-45 port.
Use only twisted-pair cables with RJ-45 connectors that conform with FCC
standards.
The following figure illustrates how the pins on the RJ-45 connector are
numbered. Be sure to hold the connectors in the same orientation when
attaching the wires to the pins.
8
8
1
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10/100BASE-TX PIN ASSIGNMENTS
Use unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable for RJ-45
connections: 100-ohm Category 3 or better cable for 10 Mbps connections, or
100-ohm Category 5 or better cable for 100 Mbps connections. Also be sure that
the length of any twisted-pair connection does not exceed 100 meters (328 feet).
The RJ-45 Input port on the power injector is wired with MDI pinouts. This means
that you must use crossover cables for connections to PCs or servers, and
straight-through cable for connections to switches or hubs. However, when
connecting to devices that support automatic MDI/MDI-X pinout configuration,
you can use either straight-through or crossover cable.
10/100BASE-TX MDI and MDI-X Port Pinouts
Pin
MDI-X Signal Name
Receive Data plus (RD+)
Receive Data minus (RD-)
Transmit Data plus (TD+)
Transmit Data minus (TD-)
Not used
MDI Signal Name
1
Transmit Data plus (TD+)
Transmit Data minus (TD-)
Receive Data plus (RD+)
Receive Data minus (RD-)
Not used
2
3
6
4,5,7,8
Note: The “+” and “-” signs represent the polarity of the wires that make up each wire pair.
B-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STRAIGHT-THROUGH WIRING
Because the 10/100 Mbps Input port on the power injector uses an MDI pin
configuration, you must use “straight-through” cable for network connections to
hubs or switches that only have MDI-X ports. However, if the device to which you
are connecting supports automatic MDI/MDI-X operation, you can use either
“straight-through” or “crossover” cable.
EIA/TIA 568B RJ-45 Wiring Standard
10/100BASE-TX Straight-through Cable
White/Orange Stripe
Orange
White/Green Stripe
Blue
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
End A
End B
White/Blue Stripe
Green
White/Brown Stripe
Brown
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CROSSOVER WIRING
Because the 10/100 Mbps port on the power injector uses an MDI pin
configuration, you must use “crossover” cable for network connections to PCs,
servers or other end nodes that only have MDI ports. However, if the device to
which you are connecting supports automatic MDI/MDI-X operation, you can use
either “straight-through” or “crossover” cable.
EIA/TIA 568B RJ-45 Wiring Standard
10/100BASE-TX Crossover Cable
White/Orange Stripe
Orange
White/Green Stripe
Blue
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
End A
End B
White/Blue Stripe
Green
White/Brown Stripe
Brown
B-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-PIN DIN CONNECTOR PINOUT
The Ethernet cable from the power injector connects to an 8-pin DIN connector
on the wireless bridge. This connector is described in the following figure and
table.
2
1
3
4
5
7
8
6
8-Pin DIN Ethernet Port Pinout
Pin
1
Signal Name
Transmit Data plus (TD+)
Transmit Data minus (TD-)
Receive Data plus (RD+)
+48 VDC power
2
3
4
5
+48 VDC power
6
Receive Data minus (RD-)
Return power
7
8
Return power
Note: The “+” and “-” signs represent the polarity of the wires that make up each wire pair.
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-PIN DIN TO RJ-45 CABLE WIRING
To construct an extended Ethernet cable to connect from the power injector’s
RJ-45 Output port to the wireless bridge’s 8-pin DIN connector, follow the wiring
diagram below. Use Category 5 or better UTP or STP cable, maximum length 100
m (328 ft), and be sure to connect all four wire pairs.
NOTE: To construct a reliable Ethernet cable, always use the proper tools or ask
a professional cable supplier to construct the cable.
White/Orange Stripe
Orange
White/Green Stripe
Blue
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8-Pin DIN
Female
RJ-45
White/Blue Stripe
Green
White/Brown Stripe
Brown
1
7
2
3
8
4
6
5
8-Pin DIN Female
Front View
B-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLOSSARY
10BASE-T
IEEE 802.3 specification for 10 Mbps Ethernet over two pairs of Category 3 or better UTP cable.
100BASE-TX
IEEE 802.3u specification for 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet over two pairs of Category 5 or better UTP
cable.
Access Point
An internetworking device that seamlessly connects wired and wireless networks. Access points
attached to a wired network, support the creation of multiple radio cells that enable roaming
throughout a facility.
Ad Hoc
A group of computers connected as an independent wireless network, without an access point.
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES)
An encryption algorithm that implements symmetric key cryptography. AES provides very strong
encryption using a completely different ciphering algorithm to TKIP and WEP.
Authentication
The process to verify the identity of a client requesting network access. IEEE 802.11 specifies two
forms of authentication: open system and shared key.
Backbone
The core infrastructure of a network. The portion of the network that transports information from
one central location to another central location where it is unloaded onto a local system.
Basic Service Set (BSS)
A set of 802.11-compliant stations and an access point that operate as a fully-connected wireless
network.
Beacon
A signal periodically transmitted from the access point that is used to identify the service set, and
to maintain contact with wireless clients.
Glossary-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Broadcast Key
Broadcast keys are sent to stations using 802.1X dynamic keying. Dynamic broadcast key
rotation is often used to allow the access point to generate a random group key and periodically
update all key-management capable wireless clients.
CSMA/CA
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP/IP network. DHCP
is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of
reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.
Encryption
Data passing between the access point and clients can use encryption to protect from
interception and evesdropping.
Extended Service Set (ESS)
More than one wireless cell can be configured with the same Service Set Identifier to allow mobile
users can roam between different cells with the Extended Service Set.
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)
An authentication protocol used to authenticate network clients. EAP is combined with IEEE
802.1X port authentication and a RADIUS authentication server to provide “mutual
authentication” between a client, the access point, and the a RADIUS server
Ethernet
A popular local area data communications network, which accepts transmission from computers
and terminals.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
A TCP/IP protocol used for file transfer.
Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
HTTP is a standard used to transmit and receive all data over the World Wide Web.
IEEE 802.11a
A wireless standard that supports high-speed communications in the 5 GHz band using
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM). The standard supports data rates of 6, 12,
24, and 54 Mbps.
Glossary-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IEEE 802.11b
A wireless standard that supports wireless communications in the 2.4 GHz band using Direct
Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS). The standard provides for data rates of 1, 2, 5.5, and 11
Mbps.
IEEE 802.11g
A wireless standard that supports wireless communications in the 2.4 GHz band using using
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM). The standard provides for data rates of 6,
9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps. IEEE 802.11g is also backward compatible with IEEE 802.11b.
IEEE 802.1X
Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID
and password for authentication.
Infrastructure
An integrated wireless and wired LAN is called an infrastructure configuration.
Inter Access Point Protocol (IAPP)
A protocol that specifies the wireless signaling required to ensure the successful handover of
wireless clients roaming between different 802.11f-compliant access points.
Local Area Network (LAN)
A group of interconnected computer and support devices.
MAC Address
The physical layer address used to uniquely identify network nodes.
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network. The time servers operate
in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet
and to national time standards via wire or radio.
Open System
A security option which broadcasts a beacon signal including the access point’s configured SSID.
Wireless clients can read the SSID from the beacon, and automatically reset their SSID to allow
immediate connection to the nearest access point.
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (ODFM)
OFDM/ allows multiple users to transmit in an allocated band by dividing the bandwidth into many
narrow bandwidth carriers.
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
A specification for providing both power and data to low-power network devices using a single
Category 5 Ethernet cable. PoE provides greater flexibility in the locating of access point’s and
network devices, and significantly decreased installation costs.
Glossary-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RADIUS
A logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to
the network.
Roaming
A wireless LAN mobile user moves around an ESS and maintains a continuous connection to the
infrastructure network.
RTS Threshold
Transmitters contending for the medium may not be aware of each other. RTS/CTS mechanism
can solve this “Hidden Node Problem.” If the packet size is smaller than the preset RTS
Threshold size, the RTS/CTS mechanism will NOT be enabled.
Service Set Identifier (SSID)
An identifier that is attached to packets sent over the wireless LAN and functions as a password
for joining a particular radio cell; i.e., Basic Service Set (BSS).
Session Key
Session keys are unique to each client, and are used to authenticate a client connection, and
correlate traffic passing between a specific client and the access point.
Shared Key
A shared key can be used to authenticate each client attached to a wireless network. Shared Key
authentication must be used along with the 802.11 Wireless Equivalent Privacy algorithm.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management
services.
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server, or can be received
via broadcasts sent by NTP servers.
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP)
A data encryption method designed as a replacement for WEP. TKIP avoids the problems of
WEP static keys by dynamically changing data encryption keys.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads.
Virtual Access Point (VAP)
Virtual AP technology multiplies the number of Access Points present within the RF footprint of a
single physical access device. With Virtual AP technology, WLAN users within the device’s
footprint can associate with what appears to be different access points and their associated
Glossary-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
network services. All the services are delivered using a single radio channel, enabling Virtual AP
technology to optimize the use of limited WLAN radio spectrum.
Virtual LAN (VLAN)
A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of
their physical location or connection point in the network. A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup
with no physical barriers, and allows users to share information and resources as though located
on the same LAN.
Wi-Fi Protected Access
WPA employs 802.1X as its basic framework for user authentication and dynamic key
management to provide an enhanced security solution for 802.11 wireless networks.
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP)
WEP is based on the use of security keys and the popular RC4 encryption algorithm. Wireless
devices without a valid WEP key will be excluded from network traffic.
WPA Pre-shared Key (PSK)
PSK can be used for small office networks that may not have the resources to configure and
maintain a RADIUS server, WPA provides a simple operating mode that uses just a pre-shared
password for network access.
Glossary-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Numbers
802.11g 6-112
D
device status, displaying 5-60, 6-26
DHCP 4-8, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 6-107, 6-108
DNS 5-6, 6-106
DTIM 5-42, 6-122
A
AES 5-58
authentication 5-10
cipher suite 6-141
closed system 6-127
configuring 5-10
E
EAP 5-57
encryption 5-50, 5-53, 5-57
Ethernet
B
port 1-5
beacon
interval 5-42, 6-121
rate 5-42, 6-122
BOOTP 6-107, 6-108
BPDU 5-31
F
factory defaults
restoring 6-11
filter 5-15, 6-79
C
cable
address 5-10, 6-79
local bridge 6-83
assignments B-1
straight-through B-3
channel 6-116
Clear To Send See CTS
CLI 6-1
command modes 6-5
community string 5-21, 6-46
configuration settings, saving or restoring 6-62
configuration, initial setup 4-1
country code
management access 5-16, 6-85
protocol types 5-16, 6-86
VLANs 5-38, 6-154
firmware
displaying version 5-27, 6-27
upgrading 5-25, 5-27, 6-62
fragmentation 6-123
G
configuring 6-13
crossover cable B-4
CSMA/CA 1-2
gateway address 5-6, 6-2, 6-107
Index-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H
HTTP, secure server 6-21
HTTPS 6-21
password
configuring 5-23, 5-27, 6-17
management 5-23, 5-27, 6-17
port priority
I
STA 6-104
IAPP 6-153
IEEE 802.11a 1-2, 5-37, 6-112
IEEE 802.11b 5-37
IEEE 802.11f 6-153
IEEE 802.11g 5-37
radio channel 5-45, 6-116
IEEE 802.1x 5-57, 6-71, 6-78
configuring 5-10, 6-71
initial setup 4-1
radio channel
configuring 4-7
RADIUS 5-8, 5-57, 6-65
RADIUS, logon authentication 5-14, 6-65
RADIUS
resetting the access point 6-11
RJ-45 port
IP address
configuring 4-8, 5-5, 6-107, 6-108
RTS
L
log
messages 5-34, 5-62, 6-33
server 5-33, 6-33
login
CLI 6-1
web 4-5
logon authentication
RADIUS client 5-14, 6-65
SNMP 5-19, 6-44
community string 6-46
enabling traps 5-20, 6-48
SNTP 5-34, 5-35, 6-38
enabling client 5-35, 6-38
server 5-35, 6-38
M
MAC address, authentication 5-12, 6-79
maximum associated clients 5-42
802.11g interface 6-115
MDI, RJ-45 pin configuration 1-5
O
software
OFDM 1-2
displaying version 5-25, 5-60, 6-27
downloading 5-27, 6-62
SSID 6-126
open system 4-9, 5-50, 6-126
Index-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
configuring 4-6
SSL 6-21
STA
interface settings 6-103 to ??
path cost 6-103
port priority 6-104
startup files, setting 6-61
status
displaying device status 5-60, 6-26
displaying station status 5-61, 6-133
straight-through cable B-3
system clock, setting 5-35, 6-39
system log
enabling 5-33, 6-33
server 5-33, 6-33
T
Telnet
for managenet access 6-2
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol See TKIP
time zone 5-35, 6-40
TKIP 5-58
trap manager 5-20, 6-48
U
user password 5-24, 6-16, 6-17
V
VLAN
W
WEP 5-53
configuring 5-53
shared key 5-57, 6-143
Wi-Fi Multimedia See WMM
Wi-Fi Protected Access See WPA
Wired Equivalent Protection See WEP
WPA 5-57
pre-shared key 6-147
Index-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|